Nikon D5500 Manual User Guide And Detail Specification

User Manual: Nikon-D5500-Manual-User-Guide-and-Detail-Specification

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 436 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

DIGITAL CAMERA
Reference Manual
En
Nikon Manual Viewer 2
Install the Nikon Manual Viewer 2 app on your smartphone or tablet
to view Nikon digital camera manuals, anytime, anywhere.
Nikon Manual Viewer 2 can be downloaded free of charge from the App Store
and Google Play.
D5500
Model Name: N1405
To get the most from your camera, please be sure to read all
instructions thoroughly and keep them where they will be read
by all who use the product.
Symbols and Conventions
To make it easier to find the information you need, the following
symbols and conventions are used:
Menu items, options, and messages displayed in the camera monitor are
shown in bold.
Camera Settings
The explanations in this manual assume that default settings are used.
DThis icon marks cautions; information that should be
read before use to prevent damage to the camera.
AThis icon marks notes; information that should be read
before using the camera.
0This icon marks references to other pages in this
manual.
A For Your Safety
Before using the camera for the first time, read the safety instructions
in “For Your Safety” (0xi–xiv).
i
For Your Safety............................................................................. xi
Notices.......................................................................................... xv
Wireless ........................................................................................ xx
Introduction 1
Getting to Know the Camera...................................................... 1
Camera Menus: An Overview ................................................... 13
Using the Touch Screen............................................................. 17
First Steps..................................................................................... 27
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (iand j)38
Framing Photos in the Viewfinder .......................................... 39
Viewing Photographs........................................................................ 42
Deleting Unwanted Pictures........................................................... 43
Framing Photos in the Monitor................................................ 45
Viewing Photographs........................................................................ 48
Deleting Unwanted Pictures........................................................... 49
Recording Movies....................................................................... 50
Viewing Movies.................................................................................... 52
Deleting Unwanted Movies............................................................. 53
Table of Contents
ii
Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation
(Scene Mode) 54
kPortrait........................................................................................ 55
lLandscape ................................................................................. 55
pChild ............................................................................................ 55
mSports .......................................................................................... 56
nClose up...................................................................................... 56
oNight Portrait............................................................................ 56
rNight Landscape ..................................................................... 57
sParty/Indoor ............................................................................. 57
tBeach/Snow.............................................................................. 57
uSunset ......................................................................................... 58
vDusk/Dawn ............................................................................... 58
wPet Portrait ................................................................................ 58
xCandlelight ................................................................................. 59
yBlossom ...................................................................................... 59
zAutumn Colors......................................................................... 59
0Food.............................................................................................. 60
Special Effects 61
%Night Vision .............................................................................. 61
SSuper Vivid................................................................................. 62
T Pop............................................................................................. 62
UPhoto Illustration .................................................................... 62
'Toy Camera Effect................................................................... 63
(Miniature Effect....................................................................... 63
3Selective Color......................................................................... 63
1Silhouette .................................................................................. 64
2High Key..................................................................................... 64
3Low Key...................................................................................... 64
Options Available in Live View....................................................... 66
iii
More on Photography 71
Choosing a Release Mode......................................................... 71
Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode)........................................ 72
Quiet Shutter Release................................................................ 74
Self-Timer Mode ......................................................................... 75
Focus (Viewfinder Photography) ............................................ 78
Choosing How the Camera Focuses: Focus Mode.................. 78
Choosing How the Focus Point Is Selected:
AF-Area Mode.................................................................................. 82
Focus Point Selection........................................................................ 85
Focus Lock............................................................................................. 86
Manual Focus ....................................................................................... 88
Image Quality and Size ............................................................. 90
Image Quality....................................................................................... 90
Image Size ............................................................................................. 92
Using the Built-in Flash ............................................................. 93
Auto Pop-up Modes........................................................................... 93
Manual Pop-up Modes ..................................................................... 95
ISO Sensitivity ............................................................................. 99
Interval Timer Photography................................................... 101
Remote Control Photography ............................................... 107
Using an Optional ML-L3 Remote Control .............................. 107
Restoring Default Settings ..................................................... 110
P, S, A, and M Modes 113
Shutter Speed and Aperture.................................................. 113
Mode P (Programmed Auto)......................................................... 115
Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto)..................................................... 117
Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto) ................................................. 118
Mode M (Manual) .............................................................................. 119
Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only)........................................ 121
iv
Exposure.................................................................................... 125
Metering.............................................................................................. 125
Autoexposure Lock.......................................................................... 127
Exposure Compensation ............................................................... 129
Flash Compensation ....................................................................... 131
Preserving Detail in Highlights and Shadows.................... 133
Active D-Lighting ............................................................................. 133
High Dynamic Range (HDR) ......................................................... 135
White Balance........................................................................... 137
Fine-Tuning White Balance .......................................................... 140
Preset Manual.................................................................................... 142
Bracketing................................................................................. 148
Picture Controls ....................................................................... 152
Selecting a Picture Control ........................................................... 152
Modifying Picture Controls........................................................... 154
Creating Custom Picture Controls ............................................. 158
Sharing Custom Picture Controls ............................................... 161
Live View 162
Framing Photographs in the Monitor.................................. 162
Focusing in Live View ..................................................................... 164
The Live View Display ..................................................................... 168
Recording and Viewing Movies 174
Recording Movies.................................................................... 174
Movie Settings................................................................................... 177
Viewing Movies........................................................................ 181
Editing Movies ......................................................................... 183
Trimming Movies ............................................................................. 183
Saving Selected Frames................................................................. 186
v
Playback and Deletion 188
Viewing Pictures....................................................................... 188
Full-Frame Playback......................................................................... 188
Thumbnail Playback ........................................................................ 190
Calendar Playback ............................................................................ 191
Photo Information ................................................................... 192
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom.................................. 200
Protecting Photographs from Deletion............................... 202
Rating Pictures.......................................................................... 203
Rating Individual Pictures.............................................................. 203
Rating Multiple Pictures ................................................................. 204
Deleting Photographs............................................................. 205
Full-Frame, Thumbnail, and Calendar Playback.................... 205
The Playback Menu.......................................................................... 206
Slide Shows ............................................................................... 208
Slide Show Options.......................................................................... 209
Connections 210
Installing ViewNX 2.................................................................. 210
Using ViewNX 2 ........................................................................ 211
Copy Pictures to the Computer................................................... 211
Printing Photographs.............................................................. 214
Connecting the Printer ................................................................... 214
Printing Pictures One at a Time................................................... 215
Printing Multiple Pictures.............................................................. 216
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set...................................... 218
Viewing Pictures on TV ........................................................... 220
Standard Definition Devices......................................................... 220
High-Definition Devices ................................................................. 222
vi
Wi-Fi 224
What Wi-Fi Can Do for You .................................................... 224
Accessing the Camera ............................................................ 225
WPS (Android Only)......................................................................... 226
PIN Entry (Android Only) ............................................................... 228
SSID (Android and iOS) .................................................................. 229
Selecting Pictures for Upload................................................ 231
Selecting Individual Pictures for Upload ................................. 231
Selecting Multiple Pictures for Upload..................................... 232
Camera Menus 233
DThe Playback Menu: Managing Images................................ 233
Playback Menu Options................................................................. 233
Playback Folder ......................................................................... 234
Playback Display Options ...................................................... 234
Image Review............................................................................. 234
Auto Image Rotation ............................................................... 235
Rotate Tall.................................................................................... 235
CThe Shooting Menu: Shooting Options................................. 236
Shooting Menu Options ................................................................ 236
Reset Shooting Menu.............................................................. 237
Storage Folder ........................................................................... 238
File Naming................................................................................. 240
NEF (RAW) Recording.............................................................. 240
ISO Sensitivity Settings........................................................... 241
Color Space ................................................................................. 243
Long Exposure NR .................................................................... 243
High ISO NR................................................................................. 244
Vignette Control........................................................................ 244
Auto Distortion Control.......................................................... 245
Optical VR .................................................................................... 245
vii
ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings........................ 246
Custom Settings................................................................................ 247
Reset Custom Settings ............................................................ 248
a: Autofocus ................................................................................... 248
a1: AF-C Priority Selection...................................................... 248
a2: Number of Focus Points................................................... 249
a3: Built-in AF-assist Illuminator .......................................... 250
a4: Rangefinder.......................................................................... 250
a5: Manual Focus Ring in AF Mode..................................... 251
b: Exposure..................................................................................... 252
b1: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl............................................ 252
b2: ISO Display............................................................................ 252
c: Timers/AE Lock ......................................................................... 252
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L .......................................... 252
c2: Auto off Timers.................................................................... 253
c3: Self-Timer .............................................................................. 254
c4: Remote on Duration (ML-L3).......................................... 254
d: Shooting/Display..................................................................... 254
d1: Exposure Delay Mode....................................................... 254
d2: File Number Sequence..................................................... 255
d3: Viewfinder Grid Display ................................................... 256
d4: Date Stamp........................................................................... 256
d5: Reverse Indicators.............................................................. 258
e: Bracketing/Flash ...................................................................... 259
e1: Flash Cntrl for Built-in Flash/Optional Flash............. 259
e2: Auto Bracketing Set........................................................... 264
f: Controls........................................................................................ 265
f1: Assign Fn Button ................................................................. 265
f2: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button................................................... 267
f3: Assign Touch Fn................................................................... 268
f4: Reverse Dial Rotation......................................................... 269
viii
BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup.............................................. 270
Setup Menu Options....................................................................... 270
Format Memory Card .............................................................. 272
Image Comment ....................................................................... 273
Copyright Information............................................................ 274
Time Zone and Date ................................................................ 275
Language..................................................................................... 275
Beep Options.............................................................................. 276
Touch Controls .......................................................................... 276
Monitor Brightness................................................................... 276
Info Display Format.................................................................. 277
Auto Info Display ...................................................................... 278
Info Display Auto Off ............................................................... 278
Image Dust Off Ref Photo ...................................................... 279
Flicker Reduction ...................................................................... 281
Slot Empty Release Lock......................................................... 281
Video Mode................................................................................. 281
Accessory Terminal .................................................................. 282
Eye-Fi Upload ............................................................................. 284
Conformity Marking................................................................. 285
Firmware Version...................................................................... 285
NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies...................... 286
Retouch Menu Options.................................................................. 286
Creating Retouched Copies.......................................................... 288
NEF (RAW) Processing............................................................. 289
Trim................................................................................................ 291
Resize ............................................................................................ 292
D-Lighting ................................................................................... 294
Quick Retouch............................................................................ 295
Red-Eye Correction .................................................................. 295
Straighten.................................................................................... 296
Distortion Control..................................................................... 296
Perspective Control.................................................................. 297
ix
Fisheye .......................................................................................... 297
Filter Effects................................................................................. 298
Monochrome.............................................................................. 299
Image Overlay ............................................................................ 300
Color Outline............................................................................... 302
Photo Illustration....................................................................... 303
Color Sketch ................................................................................ 303
Miniature Effect.......................................................................... 304
Selective Color............................................................................ 305
Painting......................................................................................... 307
Side-by-side Comparison....................................................... 307
mRecent Settings/OMy Menu ............................................. 309
Choosing a Menu.............................................................................. 309
m Recent Settings ............................................................................ 310
O My Menu......................................................................................... 310
Technical Notes 314
Compatible Lenses................................................................... 314
Compatible CPU Lenses ................................................................. 314
Compatible Non-CPU Lenses ....................................................... 316
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights)....................................... 323
Flash Units Compatible with the Creative Lighting System
(CLS) .................................................................................................. 323
Other Accessories..................................................................... 330
Approved Memory Cards............................................................... 334
Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter..................... 335
Caring for the Camera ............................................................. 337
Storage ................................................................................................. 337
Cleaning............................................................................................... 337
Image Sensor Cleaning................................................................... 338
x
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions .................... 343
Available Settings.................................................................... 348
Troubleshooting...................................................................... 350
Battery/Display.................................................................................. 350
Shooting (All Modes) ...................................................................... 351
Shooting (P, S, A, M).......................................................................... 354
Playback............................................................................................... 355
Wi-Fi (Wireless Networks).............................................................. 357
Miscellaneous.................................................................................... 357
Error Messages......................................................................... 358
Specifications ........................................................................... 364
Lens Kits .................................................................................... 377
AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR and AF-P DX
NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G ................................................. 377
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II ........................... 383
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR ..................... 388
AF-S DX NIKKOR 55–200mm f/4–5.6G ED VR II...................... 393
Memory Card Capacity ........................................................... 399
Battery Life................................................................................ 400
Index .......................................................................................... 402
xi
To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others,
read the following safety precautions in their entirety before using this
equipment.
Keep these safety instructions where all those who use the
product will read them.
The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions
listed in this section are indicated by the following symbol:
❚❚ WARNINGS
AKeep the sun out of the frame
Keep the sun well out of the frame
when shooting backlit subjects.
Sunlight focused into the camera
when the sun is in or close to the
frame could cause a fire.
ADo not look at the sun through the
viewfinder
Viewing the sun or other strong light
source through the viewfinder could
cause permanent visual impairment.
AUsing the viewfinder diopter adjustment
control
When operating the viewfinder
diopter adjustment control with your
eye to the viewfinder, care should be
taken not to put your finger in your
eye accidentally.
ATurn off immediately in the event of
malfunction
Should you notice smoke or an
unusual smell coming from the
equipment or AC adapter (available
separately), unplug the AC adapter
and remove the battery immediately,
taking care to avoid burns.
Continued operation could result in
injury.
After removing the battery,
take the equipment to a Nikon-
authorized service center for
inspection.
ADo not use in the presence of flammable
gas
Do not use electronic equipment in
the presence of flammable gas, as
this could result in explosion or fire.
For Your Safety
AThis icon marks warnings.
To prevent possible injury, read all
warnings before using this Nikon product.
xii
AKeep out of reach of children
Failure to observe this precaution
could result in injury.
In addition,
note that small parts constitute a
choking hazard.
Should a child
swallow any part of this equipment,
consult a physician immediately.
ADo not disassemble
Touching the product’s internal parts
could result in injury.
In the event of
malfunction, the product should be
repaired only by a qualified
technician.
Should the product break
open as the result of a fall or other
accident, remove the battery and/or
AC adapter and then take the product
to a Nikon-authorized service center
for inspection.
ADo not place the strap around the neck of
an infant or child
Placing the camera strap around the
neck of an infant or child could result
in strangulation.
ADo not remain in contact with the
camera, battery, or charger for extended
periods while the devices are on or in use
Parts of the device become hot.
Leaving the device in direct contact
with the skin for extended periods
may result in low-temperature burns.
ADo not leave the product where it will be
exposed to extremely high
temperatures, such as in an enclosed
automobile or in direct sunlight
Failure to observe this precaution
could cause damage or fire.
ADo not aim a flash at the operator of a
motor vehicle
Failure to observe this precaution
could result in accidents.
AObserve caution when using the flash
•Using the camera with the flash in
close contact with the skin or other
objects could cause burns.
•Using the flash close to the subject’s
eyes could cause temporary visual
impairment.
The flash should be no
less than one meter (3 ft 4 in.) from
the subject.
Particular care should
be observed when photographing
infants.
AAvoid contact with liquid crystal
Should the monitor break, care
should be taken to avoid injury due to
broken glass and to prevent the liquid
crystal from the monitor touching the
skin or entering the eyes or mouth.
ADo not carry tripods with a lens or camera
attached
You could trip or accidentally strike
others, resulting in injury.
xiii
AObserve proper precautions when
handling batteries
Batteries may leak, overheat, rupture,
or catch fire if improperly handled.
Observe the following precautions
when handling batteries for use in
this product:
•Use only batteries approved for use
in this equipment.
•Do not short or disassemble the
battery.
•Do not expose the battery or the
camera in which it is inserted to
powerful physical shocks.
•Be sure the product is off before
replacing the battery.
If you are
using an AC adapter, be sure it is
unplugged.
•Do not attempt to insert the battery
upside down or backwards.
•Do not expose the battery to flame
or to excessive heat.
•Do not immerse in or expose to
water.
•Replace the terminal cover when
transporting the battery.
Do not
transport or store the battery with
metal objects such as necklaces or
hairpins.
•Batteries are prone to leakage when
fully discharged.
To avoid damage
to the product, be sure to remove
the battery when no charge
remains.
•When the battery is not in use,
attach the terminal cover and store
in a cool, dry place.
•The battery may be hot
immediately after use or when the
product has been used on battery
power for an extended period.
Before removing the battery turn
the camera off and allow the battery
to cool.
•Discontinue use immediately
should you notice any changes in
the battery, such as discoloration or
deformation.
AObserve proper precautions when
handling the charger
•Keep dry.
Failure to observe this
precaution could result in injury or
product malfunction due to fire or
electric shock.
•Do not short the charger terminals.
Failure to observe this precaution
could result in overheating and
damage to the charger.
•Dust on or near the metal parts of
the plug should be removed with a
dry cloth.
Continued use could
result in fire.
•Do not go near the charger during
thunderstorms.
Failure to observe
this precaution could result in
electric shock.
•Do not handle the plug or charger
with wet hands. Failure to observe
this precaution could result in injury
or product malfunction due to fire
or electric shock.
•Do not use with travel converters or
adapters designed to convert from
one voltage to another or with DC-
to-AC inverters.
Failure to observe
this precaution could damage the
product or cause overheating or fire.
xiv
AUse appropriate cables
When connecting cables to the input
and output jacks, use only the cables
provided or sold by Nikon for the
purpose to maintain compliance with
product regulations.
AFollow the instructions of airline and
hospital personnel
xv
•No part of the manuals included
with this product may be
reproduced, transmitted,
transcribed, stored in a retrieval
system, or translated into any
language in any form, by any means,
without Nikon’s prior written
permission.
•Nikon reserves the right to change
the appearance and specifications
of the hardware and software
described in these manuals at any
time and without prior notice.
•Nikon will not be held liable for any
damages resulting from the use of
this product.
•While every effort has been made to
ensure that the information in these
manuals is accurate and complete,
we would appreciate it were you to
bring any errors or omissions to the
attention of the Nikon
representative in your area (address
provided separately).
Notice for Customers in Canada
CAN ICES-3 B / NMB-3 B
Notices for Customers in Europe
This symbol indicates that
electrical and electronic
equipment is to be
collected separately.
The following apply only
to users in European
countries:
•This product is designated for
separate collection at an
appropriate collection point.
Do not
dispose of as household waste.
•Separate collection and recycling
helps conserve natural resources
and prevent negative consequences
for human health and the
environment that might result from
incorrect disposal.
•For more information, contact the
retailer or the local authorities in
charge of waste management.
This symbol on the bat-
tery indicates that the
battery is to be collected
separately.
The following apply only to users in
European countries:
•All batteries, whether marked with
this symbol or not, are designated
for separate collection at an
appropriate collection point.
Do not
dispose of as household waste.
•For more information, contact the
retailer or the local authorities in
charge of waste management.
Notices
CAUTION: RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT
TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
xvi
Notices for Customers in the U.S.A.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement
This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment
off and on, the user is encouraged to try
to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
•Reorient or relocate the receiving
antenna.
•Increase the separation between
the equipment and receiver.
•Connect the equipment into an
outlet on a circuit different from that
to which the receiver is connected.
•Consult the dealer or an
experienced radio/television
technician for help.
CAUTIONS
Modifications
The FCC requires the user be notified
that any changes or modifications
made to this device that are not
expressly approved by Nikon
Corporation may void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Interface Cables
Use the interface cables sold or
provided by Nikon for your
equipment.
Using other interface
cables may exceed the limits of Class
B Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Notice for Customers in the State of California
WARNING: Handling the cord on this
product may expose you to lead, a
chemical known to the State of
California to cause birth defects or
other reproductive harm.
Wash hands
after handling.
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road,
Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.
Tel.: 631-547-4200
The Battery Charger
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS—SAVE THESE
INSTRUCTIONS
DANGER—TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS
For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter
of the proper configuration for the power outlet if needed.
This power unit
is intended to be correctly oriented in a vertical or floor mount position.
D5500
xvii
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally
copied or reproduced by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device
may be punishable by law.
•Items prohibited by law from being copied
or reproduced
Do not copy or reproduce paper
money, coins, securities,
government bonds, or local
government bonds, even if such
copies or reproductions are
stamped “Sample.”
The copying or reproduction of
paper money, coins, or securities
which are circulated in a foreign
country is prohibited.
Unless the prior permission of the
government has been obtained, the
copying or reproduction of unused
postage stamps or post cards issued
by the government is prohibited.
The copying or reproduction of
stamps issued by the government
and of certified documents stipu-
lated by law is prohibited.
•Cautions on certain copies and
reproductions
The government has issued
cautions on copies or reproductions
of securities issued by private
companies (shares, bills, checks, gift
certificates, etc.), commuter passes,
or coupon tickets, except when a
minimum of necessary copies are to
be provided for business use by a
company.
Also, do not copy or
reproduce passports issued by the
government, licenses issued by
public agencies and private groups,
ID cards, and tickets, such as passes
and meal coupons.
•Comply with copyright notices
The copying or reproduction of
copyrighted creative works such as
books, music, paintings, woodcuts,
prints, maps, drawings, movies, and
photographs is governed by
national and international
copyright laws.
Do not use this
product for the purpose of making
illegal copies or to infringe
copyright laws.
xviii
Disposing of Data Storage Devices
Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data
storage devices does not completely erase the original image data.
Deleted
files can sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using
commercially available software, potentially resulting in the malicious use of
personal image data.
Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s
responsibility.
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another
person, erase all data using commercial deletion software, or format the
device and then completely refill it with images containing no private
information (for example, pictures of empty sky).
Be sure to also replace any
pictures selected for preset manual (0146).
Before discarding the camera or
transferring ownership to another person, you should also use the Wi-Fi >
Network settings > Reset network settings (0230) option in the camera
setup menu to delete any personal network information.
Care should be
taken to avoid injury when physically destroying data storage devices.
AVC Patent Portfolio License
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL
AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH
THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED
BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS
OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO.
NO LICENSE IS
GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C.
SEE http://www.mpegla.com
xix
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories
Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex
electronic circuitry.
Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including
chargers, batteries, AC adapters, and flash accessories) certified by Nikon
specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven
to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic
circuitry.
The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage
the camera and may void your Nikon warranty.
The use of
third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not bearing the
Nikon holographic seal shown at right could interfere with
normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating, ignit-
ing, rupturing, or leaking.
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local autho-
rized Nikon dealer.
DUse Only Nikon Brand Accessories
Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with
your Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within its
operational and safety requirements.
THE USE OF NON-NIKON ACCESSORIES
COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON WARRANTY.
ABefore Taking Important Pictures
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or
before taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the
camera is functioning normally.
Nikon will not be held liable for damages
or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.
ALife-Long Learning
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing product
support and education, continually-updated information is available on-
line at the following sites:
•For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/
•For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support/
•For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information, tips,
answers to frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice on digital
imaging and photography.
Additional information may be available from
the Nikon representative in your area.
See the following URL for contact
information: http://imaging.nikon.com/
xx
This product, which contains encryption software developed in the United
States, is controlled by the United States Export Administration Regulations
and may not be exported or re-exported to any country to which the United
States embargoes goods.
The following countries are currently subject to
embargo: Cuba, Iran, North Korea, Sudan, and Syria.
The use of wireless devices may be prohibited in some countries or regions.
Contact a Nikon-authorized service representative before using the wireless
features of this product outside the country of purchase.
Notices for Customers in the U. S. A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications
made to this device that are not expressly approved by Nikon Corporation
may void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for
a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
•Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
•Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
•Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Co-location
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road, Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.
Tel.: 631-547-4200
Wireless
xxi
Notices for Customers in Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
FCC/IC RF Exposure Statement
The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are
associated with using low power wireless devices.
There is no proof, however,
that these low power wireless devices are absolutely safe.
Low power
Wireless devices emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in the
microwave range while being used.
Whereas high levels of RF can produce
health effects (by heating tissue), exposure of low-level RF that does not
produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects.
Many
studies of low-level RF exposures have not found any biological effects.
Some
studies have suggested that some biological effects might occur, but such
findings have not been confirmed by additional research.
The D5500, which
is equipped with a LBWA1U5YR1 (FCC ID: VPYLBYR650/IC ID: 772C-LBYR650)
wireless LAN module, has been tested and found to comply with FCC/IC
radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and
meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to
OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules.
Please refer
to the SAR test report that was uploaded to FCC website.
xxii
Notices for Customers in Europe
Hereby, Nikon Corporation, declares that the D5500 is in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant
provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
The declaration of conformity
may be consulted at http://imaging.nikon.com/support/pdf/DoC_D5500.pdf
Notice for Customers in Singapore
This device complies with radio-frequency regulations. The content of
certification labels not affixed to the device is given below.
Security
Although one of the benefits of this product is that it allows others to freely
connect for the wireless exchange of data anywhere within its range, the
following may occur if security is not enabled:
•Data theft: Malicious third-parties may intercept wireless transmissions to
steal user IDs, passwords, and other personal information.
•Unauthorized access: Unauthorized users may gain access to the network
and alter data or perform other malicious actions.
Note that due to the
design of wireless networks, specialized attacks may allow unauthorized
access even when security is enabled.
Trade Name:
Model: D5500
Complies with
IDA Standards
DA103423
1Introduction
Introduction
Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls
and displays.
You may find it helpful to bookmark this section
and refer to it as you read through the rest of the manual.
The Camera Body
Getting to Know the Camera
14
12
13
1516
8
9
11
10
19
18
67
3
4
5
2
1
17
1AF-assist illuminator ........... 81, 250
Self-timer lamp.............................. 76
Red-eye reduction lamp .......94, 96
2Power switch.................................. 31
3
Shutter-release button
................. 41
4E/N button...............120, 129, 131
5Movie-record button .......... 51, 175
6Live view switch....45, 50, 162, 174
7Mode dial...........................................4
8Built-in flash ................................... 93
9M/ Y button..................93, 95, 131
10 Eyelets for camera strap.............. 27
11 Fn button ...................................... 265
12 Mounting mark ............................. 29
13 Lens release button...................... 37
14 I/E/#
button ............... 71, 72, 74, 75, 107
15 Mirror............................................. 340
16 Lens mount..............................29, 89
17 CPU contacts
18 Infrared receiver for ML-L3 remote
control (front) ............................108
19 Body cap
2Introduction
31
32
33
30
29
28
27
21 2220
23 24 25
26
20 Stereo microphone ....................178
21 Accessory shoe (for optional flash
units) ............................................ 323
22 Eye sensor.................................9, 278
23 R
(information)
button
..............................8, 110, 170
24 Command dial
25 A/L button .....87, 127, 202, 267
26 Connector cover
27 G button...................13, 110, 233
28 Infrared receiver for ML-L3 remote
control (rear)..............................108
29 Speaker
30 Focal plane mark (E)...................89
31 USB and A/V
connector.................. 211, 214, 220
32 Connector for external
microphone ...............................180
33 Accessory terminal..................... 333
DClose the Connector Cover
Close the connector cover when the connectors are not in use.
Foreign
matter in the connectors can interfere with data transfer.
DThe Speaker
Do not place the speaker in close proximity to magnetic devices.
Failure to observe this precaution could affect the data recorded on
the magnetic devices.
3Introduction
34
48 35 36 37 38
39
40
41
424345 44 52
51
50
49
47
46
34 Viewfinder eyepiece.......... 5, 33, 76
35 Diopter adjustment control ....... 33
36 K button............................... 42, 188
37 P button............... 10, 171, 178, 189
38 Multi selector...........................12, 14
39 J (OK) button.........................12, 14
40 O button ................................ 43, 205
41 Memory card access
lamp....................................... 41, 163
42 Battery-chamber cover
latch .................................28, 35, 335
43 Battery-chamber cover
..........................................28, 35, 335
44 W/Q button.................14, 190, 200
45 X button.............................. 190, 200
46 Tripod socket
47 Vari-angle monitor
......................6, 17, 42, 45, 162, 188
48 Rubber eyecup.............................. 76
49 HDMI connector cover .............. 222
50 Memory card slot cover ........28, 35
51 Power connector cover for
optional power connector ...... 335
52 Battery latch....................28, 35, 335
4Introduction
The Mode Dial
The camera offers a choice of the
following shooting modes.
P, S, A, and M Modes:
•P—Programmed auto (0115)
•S— Shutter-priority auto (0117)
•A—Aperture-priority auto (0118)
•M—Manual (0119)
Special Effects Modes (061)
Auto Modes:
•i Auto (038)
•j Auto (flash off) (038)
Scene Modes (054)
5Introduction
The Viewfinder
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit
for illustrative purposes.
7
12
3
4
5
6
8
1816
19
2120
11 12 149
17
10 1513
1 Framing grid (displayed when On
is selected for Custom Setting d3,
Viewfinder grid display) ...256
2Focus points................................... 85
3AF area brackets......................33, 40
4Low battery warning ................... 34
5Monochrome indicator (displayed
in % mode or when the
Monochrome Picture Control or
a Picture Control based on
Monochrome is
selected) ............................... 61, 152
6“No memory card” indicator...... 28
7Focus indicator ........................40, 89
8Autoexposure (AE) lock
indicator.......................................127
9Shutter speed ..............................114
10 Aperture (f-number) ..................114
11 Special effects mode indicator .. 61
12 Bracketing indicator...................148
13 Number of exposures
remaining...................................... 34
Number of shots remaining before
memory buffer fills ..................... 73
White balance recording
indicator ...................................... 143
Exposure compensation
value ............................................. 129
Flash compensation value........ 131
ISO sensitivity ....................... 99, 252
Capture mode indicator
14 “k” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures)..................................... 34
15 Flash-ready indicator................... 44
16 Flexible program indicator....... 116
17 Exposure indicator ..................... 120
Exposure compensation
display.......................................... 129
Electronic rangefinder............... 250
18
Flash compensation indicator
... 131
19 Exposure compensation
indicator ...................................... 129
20 Auto ISO sensitivity indicator .. 241
21 Warning indicator....................... 358
6Introduction
The Monitor
The monitor can be angled and rotated as shown below.
Normal use: Fold the monitor
against the camera face out.
The
monitor is normally used in this
position.
Low-angle shots: Tilt the monitor
up to take shots in live view with
the camera held low.
High-angle shots: Tilt the monitor
down to take shots in live view
with the camera held high.
Self-portraits: Use for self-portraits
in live view.
The monitor shows
a mirror image of what will
appear in the final picture.
90° 180°
180°
7Introduction
DUsing the Monitor
Rotate the monitor gently within the limits shown.
Do not use force.
Failure to observe these precautions could damage the camera or
monitor.
To protect the monitor when the camera is not in use, fold it
back face down against the camera body.
Do not lift or carry the camera by the monitor.
Failure to observe this
precaution could damage the camera.
8Introduction
The Information Display
Viewing settings: To view the information
display, press the R button.
7654 89 10 11 12
1
313
2
1Shooting mode
i auto/
j auto (flash off).....................38
Scene modes ............................54
Special effects mode ..............61
P, S, A, and M modes............. 113
2Aperture (f-number).................. 114
Aperture display ......................... 114
3Shutter speed .............................. 114
Shutter-speed display ...............114
4Satellite signal indicator ........... 284
5Wi-Fi connection indicator....... 230
Eye-Fi connection indicator..... 284
6Touch Fn assignment ................ 268
7Vignette control indicator........ 244
8Exposure delay mode................ 254
9Date stamp indicator................. 256
10 Vibration reduction indicator
.................................................37, 245
11 Flash control indicator .............. 259
Flash compensation indicator for
optional flash units................... 328
12 Battery indicator............................34
13 ISO sensitivity.................................99
ISO sensitivity display..........99, 242
Auto ISO sensitivity
indicator ...................................... 242
9Introduction
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.
22
14
16
18
23
15
17
20
19
21
14 Bracketing indicator...................148
15 Autoexposure (AE) lock
indicator.......................................127
16 AF-area mode indicator .............. 82
Focus point..................................... 85
17 Release mode ................................ 71
18 ADL bracketing amount............149
19 Number of exposures
remaining...................................... 34
White balance recording
indicator.......................................143
Capture mode indicator
20 “k” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures)..................................... 34
21 z icon............................................. 24
22 Exposure indicator ..................... 120
Exposure compensation
indicator ...................................... 129
Bracketing progress
indicator ...................................... 151
23 Help icon....................................... 358
AInfo Display Auto Off
The eye sensor will automatically turn the info display off if you put
your eye to the viewfinder while the standby timer is active.
The
display will turn on again when you remove your eye from the
viewfinder.
If desired, you can prevent the information display turning
off using the Info display auto off option (0278) in the setup menu.
Note, however, that regardless of the option selected the information
display will turn off when the standby timer expires.
10 Introduction
Changing settings: To change the settings at
the bottom of the display, press the P
button, then highlight items using the
multi selector and press J to view
options for the highlighted item.
You can
also change settings by pressing the P
button during live view (0171, 178).
1
14
2
13
3
12
4
11
5
10
6
9
7
8
1Image quality .................................90
2Image size........................................92
3Auto bracketing.......................... 149
4HDR (high dynamic range)....... 135
5Active D-Lighting ....................... 133
6White balance ............................. 137
7ISO sensitivity .................................99
8Exposure compensation........... 129
9Flash compensation .................. 131
10 Flash mode .............................. 94, 96
11 Metering....................................... 125
12 AF-area mode........................82, 166
13 Focus mode ...........................78, 164
14 Picture Control............................ 152
11Introduction
ATurning the Monitor Off
To clear shooting information from the monitor, press the R button or
press the shutter-release button halfway.
The monitor will turn off
automatically if no operations are performed for about 8 seconds (for
information on choosing how long the monitor stays on, see Auto off
timers on page 253).
The monitor will also turn off if you cover the eye
sensor or look through the viewfinder.
12 Introduction
The Multi Selector
In this manual, operations using the multi selector are
represented by 1, 3, 4, and 2 icons.
1: Press the multi selector up
4: Press the multi
selector left
2: Press the multi
selector right
J button
3: Press the multi selector down
13Introduction
Most shooting, playback, and setup
options can be accessed from the camera
menus.
To view the menus, press the
G button.
Camera Menus: An Overview
Tabs
Choose from the following menus:
•D: Playback (0233) •N: Retouch (0286)
•C: Shooting (0236) •m/O: Recent settings or My Menu
(defaults to Recent settings;
0309)
•A: Custom Settings (0246)
•B: Setup (0270)
Help icon (014)
G button
Current settings are shown by
icons.
Menu options
Options in current menu.
14 Introduction
Using Camera Menus
❚❚ Menu Controls
The multi selector and J button are used to navigate the
camera menus.
AThe d (Help) Icon
If a d icon is displayed at the bottom left corner of the monitor, a
description of the currently selected option or menu can be displayed
by pressing the W (Q) button.
Press 1 or 3 to scroll through the
display.
Press W (Q) again to return to the menus.
2: Select highlighted item
or display sub-menu
1: Move cursor up
3: Move cursor down
J button: select
highlighted item
4: Cancel and
return to
previous
menu
W (Q) button
15Introduction
❚❚ Navigating the Menus
Follow the steps below to navigate the menus.
1Display the menus.
Press the G button to
display the menus.
2Highlight the icon for the
current menu.
Press 4 to highlight the
icon for the current menu.
3Select a menu.
Press 1 or 3 to select the desired menu.
4Position the cursor in the
selected menu.
Press 2 to position the
cursor in the selected
menu.
G button
16 Introduction
5Highlight a menu item.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a
menu item.
6Display options.
Press 2 to display options
for the selected menu item.
7Highlight an option.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight
an option.
8Select the highlighted item.
Press J to select the highlighted item.
To exit
without making a selection, press the G button.
Note the following:
•Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently
available.
•While pressing 2 generally has the same effect as pressing J,
there are some cases in which selection can only be made by
pressing J.
•To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the
shutter-release button halfway (041).
17Introduction
The touch-sensitive monitor supports
the following operations:
Flick
Slide
Stretch/Pinch
Using the Touch Screen
Flick a finger a short distance across the
monitor.
Slide a finger over the monitor.
Place two fingers on the monitor and
move them apart or pinch them together.
18 Introduction
DThe Touch Screen
The touch screen responds to static electricity and may not respond
when covered with third-party protective films or when touched with
fingernails or gloved hands.
Do not use excessive force or touch the
screen with sharp objects.
DUsing the Touch Screen
The touch screen may not respond as expected if you attempt to
operate it while leaving your palm or another finger resting on it in
second location.
It may not recognize other gestures if your touch is
too soft, your fingers are moved too quickly or too short a distance or
do not remain in contact with the screen, or if the movement of the
two fingers in a pinch or stretch is not correctly coordinated.
AEnabling or Disabling Touch Controls
Touch controls can be enabled or disabled using the Touch controls
option in the setup menu (0276).
Select Enable to enable touch
controls for shooting, playback, and menu navigation or Playback
only to enable touch controls for playback only.
19Introduction
Touch-Screen Photography
Tap icons in the shooting display to adjust camera settings (note
that not all icons will respond to touch-screen operations).
During live view, you can also take photographs by tapping the
monitor.
❚❚ Viewfinder Photography
Use the touch screen to adjust settings in the information
display (08).
Scene/Effect Selection
In scene and special effects modes (054, 61), you can tap the
shooting mode icon to choose a scene or effect.
Tap x or y to
view the different options and tap an icon to select and return to
the previous display.
Shutter Speed and Aperture
In modes S, A, and M, you can tap the w icon next to the shutter
speed or aperture displays to view x and y controls, which you
can tap to choose a new value.
Tap 1 to exit when the operation
is complete.
20 Introduction
Shooting Options
To change camera settings (010), tap the z icon at the bottom
right corner of the display and then tap icons to display options
for the corresponding setting.
Tap the desired option to select it
and return to the previous display.
If prompted to choose a value as shown
at right, edit the value by tapping u or v
and then tap the number or tap 0 to
select it and return to the previous
display.
To exit without changing settings, tap
2.
21Introduction
❚❚ Live View Photography
The touch screen can be used to adjust settings and take
photographs.
Taking Photographs (Touch Shutter)
Touch the monitor to focus and lift your
finger to take the photograph.
Tap the icon shown at right to choose
the operation performed by tapping the
monitor in shooting mode.
Choose
from the following options:
Focus locks while your finger is on the monitor.
During movie
recording, the touch shutter remains off (7) and you can
refocus at any time by touching your subject in the monitor; the
touch shutter options icon is not displayed.
Option Description
3(touch shutter on)
Touch the monitor to position the focus point
and focus (autofocus only; the touch shutter
can not be used to focus when MF—manual
focus—is selected for focus mode as
described on page 164). The shutter is
released when you lift your finger from the
screen.
7(touch shutter off) As above, except that lifting your finger from
the screen does not release the shutter.
22 Introduction
DTaking Pictures Using Tap Shooting Options
Avoid moving the camera when releasing the shutter.
Camera
movement can result in blurred photographs.
The shutter-release button can be used to focus and take pictures even
when the 3 icon is displayed to show that touch shooting options are
active.
Use the shutter-release button to take photographs in
continuous shooting mode (072) and during movie recording.
Touch
shooting options can be used only to take pictures one at a time in
continuous shooting mode and can not be used to take photographs
during movie recording.
While subject tracking (0166) is active and 7 (touch shutter off) is
selected, you can focus on the current subject by tapping the monitor.
In self-timer mode (075), focus locks on the selected subject when
you touch the monitor and the timer starts when you lift your finger
from the screen.
At default settings, the shutter is released about 10 s
after the timer starts; the delay and number of shots can be changed
using Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer, 0254).
If the option selected for
Number of shots is greater than 1, the camera will automatically take
pictures one after the other until the selected number of shots is
recorded.
23Introduction
Scene/Effect Selection
In scene and special effects modes (054, 61), you can tap the
shooting mode icon to choose a scene or effect.
Tap x or y to
view the different options and tap an icon to select and return to
the previous display.
Shutter Speed and Aperture
In modes S, A, and M, tapping the shutter speed or aperture
displays x and y controls, which you can tap to choose a new
value.
Tap 1 to exit when the operation is complete.
24 Introduction
Shooting Options
In live view, pressing the P button or tapping the z icon in the
monitor activates the information display (0171, 178).
Tap a
setting to view options and then tap the desired option to select
it and return to live view.
If prompted to choose a value as shown
at right, edit the value by tapping u or v
and then tap the number or tap 0 to
select it and return to the previous
display.
To exit without changing settings, tap
2.
25Introduction
Viewing Pictures
The touch screen can be used for the following playback
operations (042, 188).
View other
images
Flick left or right to view other
images.
Zoom in
(photos only)
Use stretch and pinch gestures to
zoom in and out and slide to scroll
(0200).
View
thumbnails
To “zoom out” to a thumbnail view
(0190), use a pinch gesture in
full-frame playback. Use pinch and
stretch to choose the number of
images displayed from 4, 12, or 80
frames.
View movies
Tap the on-screen guide to start
movie playback (movies are
indicated by a 1 icon). Tap the
display to pause or resume, or tap
1 to exit to full-frame playback
(note that some of the icons in the
movie playback display do not
respond to touch-screen
operations).
Guide
26 Introduction
Using the Menus
The touch screen can be used for the following menu
operations.
Scroll Slide up or down to scroll.
Choose a
menu
Tap a menu icon to choose a
menu.
Select
options/
adjust
settings
Tap menu items to display options
and tap icons or sliders to change.
To exit without changing settings,
tap 1.
27Introduction
Follow the eight steps below to ready the camera for use.
1Attach the strap.
Attach the strap as shown. Repeat for the second eyelet.
2Charge the battery.
If a plug adapter is supplied, raise the wall plug and connect
the plug adapter as shown below at left, making sure the
plug is fully inserted.
Insert the battery and plug the charger
in.
An exhausted battery will fully charge in about an hour
and 50 minutes.
First Steps
A The Battery and Charger
Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages xi–xiv and 343–347
of this manual.
Battery charging
Charging complete
28 Introduction
3Insert the battery and memory card.
Before inserting or removing the battery or memory cards,
confirm that power switch is in the OFF position.
Insert the
battery in the orientation shown, using the battery to keep
the orange battery latch pressed to one side.
The latch locks
the battery in place when the battery is fully inserted.
Slide the memory card in until it clicks into place.
Battery latch
29Introduction
4Attach a lens.
Be careful to prevent dust from entering the camera when
the lens or body cap is removed.
Be sure to remove the lens cap before taking pictures.
Remove the camera
body cap
Remove the rear
lens cap
Mounting mark (lens)
Mounting mark (camera)
Align the mounting
marks
Rotate the lens as shown until it clicks into place
30 Introduction
ALenses with Retractable Lens Barrel Buttons
Before using the camera, unlock and extend the lens.
Keeping the
retractable lens barrel button pressed (q), rotate the zoom ring as
shown (w).
Pictures can not be taken when the lens is
retracted; if an error message is displayed
as a result of the camera having been
turned on with the lens retracted, rotate
the zoom ring until the message is no
longer displayed.
Retractable lens barrel button
31Introduction
5Open the monitor.
Open the monitor as shown.
Do not use force.
6Turn the camera on.
A language-selection
dialog will be displayed.
AThe Power Switch
Rotate the power switch as shown to turn the camera on.
Rotate the power switch as shown to turn the camera off.
32 Introduction
7Choose a language
and set the camera
clock.
Use the multi selector
and J button to
select a language and
set the camera clock.
qw
Select language Select time zone
er
Select date format Select daylight saving time
option
t
Set time and date (note that the
camera uses a 24-hour clock)
AThe Camera Clock
The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household
clocks.
Check the clock regularly against more accurate time pieces
and reset as necessary.
Move cursor up
J button: select
highlighted item
Select highlighted
item or display sub-
menu
Move cursor down
33Introduction
8Focus the viewfinder.
After removing the lens
cap, rotate the diopter
adjustment control until
the AF area brackets are in
sharp focus.
When
operating the control with
your eye to the viewfinder, be careful not to put your fingers
or fingernails in your eye.
The camera is now ready for use.
Proceed to page 38 for
information on taking photographs.
AF area
brackets
Viewfinder not in focus Viewfinder in focus
AThe Clock Battery
The camera clock is powered by an independent, rechargeable power
source, which is charged as necessary when the main battery is
installed.
Three days of charging will power the clock for about a
month.
If a message warning that the clock is not set is displayed
when the camera is turned on, the clock battery is exhausted and the
clock has been reset.
Set the clock to the correct time and date.
34 Introduction
❚❚ The Battery Level and Number of Exposures Remaining
Press the R button and check the battery level and number of
exposures remaining in the information display.
Battery Level
If the battery is low, a warning will also be displayed in the
viewfinder. If the information display does not appear when the
R button is pressed, the battery is exhausted and needs to be
recharged.
Number of Exposures Remaining
Values over 1000 are shown in thousands, indicated by the letter
“k”.
Information
display Viewfinder Description
L— Battery fully charged.
K— Battery partially discharged.
HdLow battery.
Ready fully-charged spare
battery or prepare to charge battery.
H
(flashes)
d
(flashes) Battery exhausted.
Charge battery.
Battery level
R button Number of exposures
remaining
35Introduction
❚❚ Removing the Battery and Memory Cards
Removing the Battery
Turn the camera off and open the battery-
chamber cover.
Press the battery latch in the
direction shown by the arrow to release the
battery and then remove the battery by hand.
Removing Memory Cards
After confirming that the memory card access
lamp is off, turn the camera off, open the
memory card slot cover, and press the card in
to eject it (q).
The card can then be removed
by hand (w).
AThe Write Protect Switch
SD memory cards are equipped
with a write protect switch to
prevent accidental loss of data.
When this switch is in the “lock”
position, the memory card can not
be formatted and photos can not
be deleted or recorded (a beep will sound if you attempt to release the
shutter).
To unlock the memory card, slide the switch to the “write”
position.
16
GB
Write-protect switch
16 GB
36 Introduction
DMemory Cards
•Memory cards may be hot after use.
Observe due caution when
removing memory cards from the camera.
•Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards.
Do
not remove memory cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or
remove or disconnect the power source during formatting or while
data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer.
Failure to
observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to
the camera or card.
•Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.
•Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.
•Do not apply force to the card casing.
Failure to observe this
precaution could damage the card.
•Do not expose to water, heat, high levels of humidity, or direct
sunlight.
•Do not format memory cards in a computer.
37Introduction
❚❚ Detaching the Lens
Be sure the camera is off when removing or
exchanging lenses.
To remove the lens, press
and hold the lens release button (q) while
turning the lens clockwise (w).
After
removing the lens, replace the lens caps and
camera body cap.
AA-M, M/A-M, and A/M-M Switches
When using autofocus with a lens equipped
with an A-M mode switch, slide the switch to
A (if the lens has an M/A-M or A/M-M switch,
select M/A or A/M).
For information on other
lenses that can be used with this camera, see
page 314.
AVibration Reduction (VR)
Vibration reduction can be enabled by
selecting On for Optical VR in the shooting
menu (0245), if the lens supports this
option, or by sliding the lens vibration
reduction switch to ON, if the lens is
equipped with a vibration reduction switch.
A vibration reduction indicator appears in
the information display when vibration
reduction is on.
ARetracting Lenses with Retractable Lens Barrel Buttons
To retract the lens when the camera is not in
use, press and hold the retractable lens
barrel button (q) and rotate the zoom ring
to the “L” (lock) position as shown (w).
Retract the lens before removing it from the
camera, and be careful not to press the
retractable lens barrel button when
attaching or removing the lens.
38 “Point-and-Shoot” Modes (iand j)
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (iand j)
This section describes how to shoot
photographs and movies in i and j modes,
automatic “point-and-shoot” modes in which
the majority of settings are controlled by the
camera in response to shooting conditions.
Before proceeding, turn the
camera on and rotate the
mode dial to i or j (the only
difference between the two is
that the flash will not fire in j
mode).
Viewfinder photography
Taking photographs
Viewing photographs
Deleting photographs
039
042
043
Live view
Taking photographs
Viewing photographs
Deleting photographs
045
048
049
Shooting movies
Viewing movies
Deleting movies
050
052
053
Mode dial
39“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (iand j)
1Ready the camera.
When framing photographs in the viewfinder, hold the
handgrip in your right hand and cradle the camera body or
lens with your left.
When framing photographs in
portrait (tall) orientation, hold the
camera as shown at right.
Framing Photos in the Viewfinder
AUsing a Zoom Lens
Before focusing, rotate the zoom ring to
adjust the focal length and frame the
photograph. Use the zoom ring to zoom in
on the subject so that it fills a larger area of
the frame, or zoom out to increase the area
visible in the final photograph (select longer
focal lengths on the lens focal length scale to
zoom in, shorter focal lengths to zoom out).
If the lens is equipped with a retractable lens
barrel button (030), press and hold the
button while rotating the zoom ring until
the lens is released and the message shown
at right is no longer displayed, and then
adjust zoom using the zoom ring.
Zoom in
Zoom out
Zoom ring
40 “Point-and-Shoot” Modes (iand j)
2Frame the photograph.
Frame a photograph in the viewfinder
with the main subject in the AF area
brackets.
3Press the shutter-release
button halfway.
Press the shutter-release
button halfway to focus
(if
the subject is poorly lit, the
flash may pop up and the
AF-assist illuminator may
light). When the focus
operation is complete, a
beep will sound (a beep
may not sound if the subject is moving) and the active focus
point and in-focus indicator (I) will appear in the viewfinder.
In-focus indicator Description
ISubject in focus.
I (flashes) Camera unable to focus using autofocus.
See
page 80.
Focus point
In-focus
indicator
Buffer
capacity
41“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (iand j)
4Shoot.
Smoothly press the
shutter-release button the
rest of the way down to
take the photograph.
The
memory card access lamp
will light and the
photograph will be
displayed in the monitor
for a few seconds.
Do not
eject the memory card or
remove or disconnect the
power source until the lamp
has gone out and recording
is complete.
AThe Shutter-Release Button
The camera has a two-stage shutter-release button.
The camera
focuses when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
To take
the photograph, press the shutter-release button the rest of the way
down.
Focus: press halfway Shoot: press all the
way down
Pressing the shutter-release button halfway also ends playback and
readies the camera for immediate use.
Memory card access
lamp
42 “Point-and-Shoot” Modes (iand j)
Viewing Photographs
Pressing K displays a picture in the
monitor.
Press 4 or 2 to view additional pictures.
43“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (iand j)
Deleting Unwanted Pictures
Display the photograph you wish to
delete. Note that photographs can not be
recovered once deleted.
Press O; a confirmation dialog will be
displayed.
Press the O button again to delete the
picture.
K button
O button
44 “Point-and-Shoot” Modes (iand j)
AThe Standby Timer (Viewfinder Photography)
The viewfinder and information display will turn off if no
operations are performed for about eight seconds,
reducing the drain on the battery.
Press the shutter-
release button halfway to reactivate the display.
The
length of time before the standby timer expires
automatically can be selected using Custom Setting c2 (Auto off
timers; 0253).
Exposure meters off Exposure meters on
AThe Built-in Flash
If additional lighting is required for correct
exposure in i mode, the built-in flash will
pop up automatically when the shutter-
release button is pressed halfway (093).
If
the flash is raised, photographs can only be
taken when the flash-ready indicator (M) is
displayed.
If the flash-ready indicator is not
displayed, the flash is charging; remove your
finger briefly from the shutter-release
button and try again.
When the flash is not in use, return it to its
closed position by pressing it gently
downward till the latch clicks into place.
45“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (iand j)
1Rotate the live view switch.
The view through the lens will be
displayed in the camera monitor (live
view).
2Ready the camera.
Hold the handgrip in your right hand and cradle the camera
body or lens with your left.
When framing photographs in
portrait (tall) orientation, hold the
camera as shown at right.
Framing Photos in the Monitor
Live view switch
46 “Point-and-Shoot” Modes (iand j)
3Focus.
Press the shutter-release
button halfway.
The focus
point will flash green while
the camera focuses.
If the
camera is able to focus, the
focus point will be
displayed in green; if the camera is unable to focus, the focus
point will flash red.
4Take the picture.
Press the shutter-release
button the rest of the way
down.
The monitor turns
off and the memory card
access lamp lights during
recording.
Do not eject the
memory card or remove or
disconnect the power source
until the lamp has gone out
and recording is complete.
When recording is
complete, the photograph
will be displayed in the
monitor for a few seconds.
Rotate the live view switch to exit live view.
Focus point
Memory card access lamp
47“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (iand j)
AAutomatic Scene Selection (Scene Auto Selector)
If live view is selected in i or j mode, the
camera will automatically analyze the
subject and select the appropriate
shooting mode when autofocus is
enabled.
The selected mode is shown in
the monitor.
cPortrait Human portrait subjects
dLandscape Landscapes and cityscapes
eClose up Subjects close to the camera
fNight portrait Portrait subjects framed against a dark
background
ZAuto Subjects suited to i or j mode or that do not
fall into the categories listed above
bAuto (flash off)
ALive View
For more information on taking photographs in live view, see page
162.
48 “Point-and-Shoot” Modes (iand j)
Viewing Photographs
Pressing K displays a picture in the
monitor.
Press 4 or 2 to view additional pictures.
49“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (iand j)
Deleting Unwanted Pictures
Display the photograph you wish to
delete.
Note that photographs can not be
recovered once deleted.
Press O; a confirmation dialog will be
displayed.
Press the O button again to delete the
picture.
K button
O button
50 “Point-and-Shoot” Modes (iand j)
Movies can be recorded in live view mode.
1Rotate the live view switch.
The view through the lens is displayed
in the monitor.
2Ready the camera.
Hold the handgrip in your right hand and cradle the camera
body or lens with your left.
3Focus.
Press the shutter-release
button halfway to focus.
Recording Movies
Focus point
51“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (iand j)
4Start recording.
Press the movie-record button to start
recording.
A recording indicator and
the time available are displayed in the
monitor.
5End recording.
Press the movie-record button again
to end recording.
Rotate the live view
switch to exit live view.
Movie-record button
Time remaining
Recording indicator
52 “Point-and-Shoot” Modes (iand j)
Viewing Movies
Press K to start playback and then scroll
through pictures until a movie (indicated
by a 1 icon) is displayed.
Press J to start
playback and press 1 or K to end
playback. For more information, see page
181.
ARecording Movies
See page 174 for more information on recording movies.
53“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (iand j)
Deleting Unwanted Movies
Display the movie you wish to delete
(movies are indicated by 1 icons).
Note
that movies can not be recovered once
deleted.
Press O; a confirmation dialog will be
displayed.
Press the O button again to delete the
movie.
K button
O button
54 Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)
Matching Settings to the Subject or
Situation (Scene Mode)
The camera offers a choice of “scene” modes.
Choosing a scene
mode automatically optimizes settings to suit the selected
scene, making creative photography as simple as selecting a
mode, framing a picture, and shooting as described on page 38.
The following scenes can be selected by rotating the mode dial
to h and rotating the command dial until the desired scene
appears in the monitor.
Mode dial Command dial Monitor
+
kPortrait
lLandscape
pChild
mSports
nClose up
oNight Portrait
rNight Landscape
sParty/Indoor
tBeach/Snow
uSunset
vDusk/Dawn
wPet Portrait
xCandlelight
yBlossom
zAutumn Colors
0Food
55Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)
kPortrait
Use for portraits with soft, natural-
looking skin tones.
If the subject is
far from the background or a
telephoto lens is used, background
details will be softened to lend the
composition a sense of depth.
lLandscape
Use for vivid landscape shots in
daylight.
ANote
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.
pChild
Use for snapshots of children.
Clothing and background details
are vividly rendered, while skin
tones remain soft and natural.
56 Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)
mSports
Fast shutter speeds freeze motion
for dynamic sports shots in which
the main subject stands out clearly.
ANote
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.
nClose up
Use for close-up shots of flowers,
insects, and other small objects (a
macro lens can be used to focus at
very close ranges).
oNight Portrait
Use for a natural balance between
the main subject and the
background in portraits taken
under low light.
57Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)
rNight Landscape
Reduce noise and unnatural colors
when photographing night
landscapes, including street
lighting and neon signs.
ANote
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.
sParty/Indoor
Capture the effects of indoor
background lighting.
Use for
parties and other indoor scenes.
tBeach/Snow
Capture the brightness of sunlit
expanses of water, snow, or sand.
ANote
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.
58 Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)
uSunset
Preserves the deep hues seen in
sunsets and sunrises.
ANote
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.
vDusk/Dawn
Preserves the colors seen in the
weak natural light before dawn or
after sunset.
ANote
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.
wPet Portrait
Use for portraits of active pets.
ANote
The AF-assist illuminator turns off.
59Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)
xCandlelight
For photographs taken by
candlelight.
ANote
The built-in flash turns off.
yBlossom
Use for fields of flowers, orchards in
bloom, and other landscapes
featuring expanses of blossoms.
ANote
The built-in flash turns off.
zAutumn Colors
Captures the brilliant reds and
yellows in autumn leaves.
ANote
The built-in flash turns off.
60 Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)
0Food
Use for vivid photographs of food.
ANote
For flash photography, press the M (Y) button to raise the flash (095).
APreventing Blur
Use a tripod to prevent blur caused by camera shake at slow shutter
speeds.
61Special Effects
Special Effects
Special effects can be used when taking photographs and
shooting movies.
The following effects can be selected by rotating the mode dial
to q and rotating the command dial until the desired option
appears in the monitor.
Mode dial Command dial Monitor
+
%Night Vision
SSuper Vivid
TPop
UPhoto Illustration
'Toy Camera Effect
(Miniature Effect
3Selective Color
1Silhouette
2High Key
3Low Key
%Night Vision
Use under conditions of darkness to
record monochrome images at high
ISO sensitivities.
ANote
Pictures may be affected by noise in the form of randomly-spaced bright
pixels, fog, or lines.
Autofocus is available in live view only; manual focus
can be used if the camera is unable to focus.
The built-in flash and AF-
assist illuminator turn off.
62 Special Effects
SSuper Vivid
Overall saturation and contrast are
increased for a more vibrant image.
T Pop
Overall saturation is increased for a
more lively image.
UPhoto Illustration
Sharpen outlines and simplify
coloring for a poster effect that can
be adjusted in live view (066).
ANote
Movies shot in this mode play back like a slide show made up of a series
of stills.
63Special Effects
'Toy Camera Effect
Create photos and movies that
appear to have been shot with a toy
camera.
The effect can be adjusted
in live view (067).
(Miniature Effect
Create photos that appear to be
pictures of dioramas.
Works best
when shooting from a high vantage
point.
Miniature effect movies play
back at high speed, compressing
about 45 minutes of footage shot at
1920 × 1080/30p into a movie that
plays back in about three minutes.
The effect can be adjusted in live
view (068).
ANote
Sound is not recorded with movies.
The built-in flash and AF-assist
illuminator turn off.
3Selective Color
All colors other than the selected
colors are recorded in black and
white.
The effect can be adjusted in
live view (069).
ANote
The built-in flash turns off.
64 Special Effects
1Silhouette
Silhouette subjects against bright
backgrounds.
ANote
The built-in flash turns off.
2High Key
Use with bright scenes to create
bright images that seem filled with
light.
ANote
The built-in flash turns off.
3Low Key
Use with dark scenes to create dark,
low-key images with prominent
highlights.
ANote
The built-in flash turns off.
65Special Effects
ANEF (RAW)
NEF (RAW) recording is not available in %, S, T, U, ', (, and 3 modes.
Pictures taken when an NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW)+JPEG option is
selected in these modes will be recorded as JPEG images.
JPEG images
created at settings of NEF (RAW)+JPEG will be recorded at the selected
JPEG quality, while images recorded at a setting of NEF (RAW) will be
recorded as fine-quality images.
AU and ( Modes
Autofocus is not available during movie recording.
The live view
refresh rate will drop, together with the frame rate for continuous
release modes; using autofocus during live view photography will
disrupt the preview.
APreventing Blur
Use a tripod to prevent blur caused by camera shake at slow shutter
speeds.
66 Special Effects
Options Available in Live View
Settings for the selected effect are adjusted in the live view
display but apply during live view and viewfinder photography
and movie recording.
❚❚ UPhoto Illustration
1Select live view.
Rotate the live view switch.
The view
through the lens will be displayed in
the monitor.
2Adjust outline thickness.
Press J to display the options shown
at right.
Press 4 or 2 to make
outlines thicker or thinner.
3Press J.
Press J to exit when settings are complete.
To resume
viewfinder photography, rotate the live view switch.
The
selected settings will continue in effect and will apply to
photographs and movies recorded in live view or using the
viewfinder.
67Special Effects
❚❚ ' Toy Camera Effect
1Select live view.
Rotate the live view switch.
The view
through the lens will be displayed in
the monitor.
2Adjust options.
Press J to display the options shown
at right.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight
Vividness or Vignetting and press 4
or 2 to change.
Adjust vividness to
make colors more or less saturated,
vignetting to control the amount of vignetting.
3Press J.
Press J to exit when settings are complete.
To resume
viewfinder photography, rotate the live view switch.
The
selected settings will continue in effect and will apply to
photographs and movies recorded in live view or using the
viewfinder.
Live view switch
68 Special Effects
❚❚ (Miniature Effect
1Select live view.
Rotate the live view switch.
The view
through the lens will be displayed in
the monitor.
2Position the focus point.
Use the multi selector to position the
focus point in the area that will be in
focus and then press the shutter-
release button halfway to focus.
To
temporarily clear miniature effect
options from the display and enlarge the view in the monitor
for precise focus, press X.
Press W (Q) to restore the
miniature effect display.
3Display options.
Press J to display miniature effect
options.
4Adjust options.
Press 4 or 2 to choose the
orientation of the area that will be in
focus and press 1 or 3 to adjust its
width.
69Special Effects
5Press J.
Press J to exit when settings are complete.
To resume
viewfinder photography, rotate the live view switch.
The
selected settings will continue in effect and will apply to
photographs and movies recorded in live view or using the
viewfinder.
❚❚ 3Selective Color
1Select live view.
Rotate the live view switch.
The view
through the lens will be displayed in
the monitor.
2Display options.
Press J to display selective color
options.
3Select a color.
Frame an object in the white square in
the center of the display and press 1
to choose the color of the object as
one that will remain in the final image
(the camera may have difficulty
detecting unsaturated colors; choose
a saturated color).
To zoom in on the center of the display for
more precise color selection, press X.
Press W (Q) to zoom
out.
Live view switch
Selected color
70 Special Effects
4Choose the color range.
Press 1 or 3 to increase or decrease
the range of similar hues that will be
included in the final image.
Choose
from values between 1 and 7; note
that higher values may include hues
from other colors.
5Select additional colors.
To select additional colors,
rotate the command dial to
highlight another of the
three color boxes at the top
of the display and repeat
Steps 3 and 4 to select another color.
Repeat for a third color
if desired.
To deselect the highlighted color, press O (To
remove all colors, press and hold O.
A confirmation dialog
will be displayed; select Yes ).
6Press J.
Press J to exit when settings are complete.
During shooting,
only objects of the selected hues will be recorded in color; all
others will be recorded in black-and-white.
To resume
viewfinder photography, rotate the live view switch.
The
selected settings will continue in effect and will apply to
photographs and movies recorded in live view or using the
viewfinder.
Color range
71More on Photography
More on Photography
To choose how the shutter is released
(release mode), press the I (E/#)
button, then highlight the desired option
and press J.
Choosing a Release Mode
AChoosing a Release Mode with the Command
Dial
The release mode can also be selected by
keeping the I (E/#) button pressed while
rotating the command dial.
Release the
I(E/#) button to select the highlighted
option and return to the information
display.
Mode Description
8Single frame: Camera takes one photograph each time shutter-
release button is pressed.
!Continuous L: The camera takes photographs at a slow rate while
the shutter-release button is pressed (072).
9Continuous H: The camera takes photographs at a fast rate while
the shutter-release button is pressed (072).
JQuiet shutter release: As for single-frame, except that camera noise
is reduced (074).
ESelf-timer: Take pictures with the self-timer (075).
"Delayed remote (ML-L3): Shutter is released 2 s after shutter-release
button on optional ML-L3 remote control is pressed (0107).
#
Quick-response remote (ML-L3): Shutter is released when shutter-
release button on optional ML-L3 remote control is pressed
(0107).
I (E/#) button
72 More on Photography
In ! (Continuous L) and 9 (Continuous H) modes, the
camera takes photographs continuously while the shutter-
release button is pressed all the way down.
1Press the I (E/#) button.
2Choose a continuous release mode.
Highlight ! (Continuous L) or
9(Continuous H) and press J.
3Focus.
Frame the shot and focus.
4Take photographs.
The camera will take photographs
while the shutter-release button is
pressed all the way down.
Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode)
73More on Photography
A The Memory Buffer
The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage,
allowing shooting to continue while photographs are being saved to
the memory card.
Up to 100 photographs can be taken in succession
(an exception is if a shutter speed of 4 seconds or slower is selected in
mode S or M, when there is no limit on the number of shots that can be
taken in a single burst).
Depending on the battery level and the
number of images in the buffer, recording may take from a few
seconds to a few minutes.
If the battery is exhausted while images
remain in the buffer, the shutter release will be disabled and the
images transferred to the memory card.
AFrame Rate
For information on the number of photographs can be taken in
continuous release modes, see page 366.
Frame rates may drop when
the memory buffer is full or the battery is low.
AThe Built-in Flash
Continuous release modes can not be used with the built-in flash;
rotate the mode dial to j (038) or turn the flash off (094).
ABuffer Size
The approximate number of images that
can be stored in the memory buffer at
current settings is shown in the viewfinder exposure-count display
while the shutter-release button is pressed.
74 More on Photography
Choose this mode to keep camera noise to a minimum.
A beep
does not sound when the camera focuses.
1Press the I (E/#) button.
2Select J (Quiet shutter release).
Highlight J (Quiet shutter release)
and press J.
3Take pictures.
Press the shutter-release button all
the way down to shoot.
Quiet Shutter Release
75More on Photography
The self-timer can be used for self-portraits or group shots that
include the photographer. Before proceeding, mount the
camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level surface.
1Press the I (E/#) button.
2Select E (Self-timer) mode.
Highlight E (Self-timer) and press J.
3Frame the photograph.
Self-Timer Mode
I (E/#) button
76 More on Photography
4Take the photograph.
Press the shutter-release button
halfway to focus, and then press the
button the rest of the way down.
The
self-timer lamp will start to flash and a
beep will begin to sound.
Two
seconds before the photo is taken, the
lamp will stop flashing and the
beeping will become more rapid.
The
shutter will be released ten seconds
after the timer starts.
Note that the timer may not start or a photograph may not be
taken if the camera is unable to focus or in other situations in
which the shutter can not be released.
To stop the timer
without taking a photograph, turn the camera off.
ACover the Viewfinder
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from appearing in the
photograph or interfering with exposure, we recommend that you
cover the viewfinder with your hand or other objects such as an
optional eyepiece cap (0331) when taking pictures without your eye
to the viewfinder. To attach the cap, remove the rubber eyecup (q)
and insert the cap as shown (w).
Rubber eyecup Eyepiece cap
77More on Photography
AUsing the Built-in Flash
Before taking a photograph with the flash in modes that require the
flash to be raised manually, press the M (Y) button to raise the flash
and wait for the M indicator to be displayed in the viewfinder (044).
Shooting will be interrupted if the flash is raised after the self-timer has
started.
ACustom Setting c3 (Self-Timer)
For information on choosing the duration of the self-timer and the
number of shots taken, see Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer; 0254).
78 More on Photography
This section describes the focus options available when
photographs are framed in the viewfinder.
Focus can be
adjusted automatically or manually (see “Choosing How the
Camera Focuses: Focus Mode,” below).
The user can also select
the focus point for automatic or manual focus (085) or use
focus lock to focus to recompose photographs after focusing
(086).
Choosing How the Camera Focuses: Focus Mode
Choose from the following focus modes.
Note that AF-S and AF-C
are available only in modes P, S, A, and M.
Focus (Viewfinder Photography)
Option Description
AF-A Auto-servo AF
Camera automatically selects single-servo
autofocus if subject is stationary, continuous-
servo autofocus if subject is moving.
Shutter
can only be released if camera is able to focus.
AF-S Single-servo AF
For stationary subjects.
Focus locks when
shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
Shutter can only be released if camera is able
to focus.
AF-C Continuous-
servo AF
For moving subjects.
Camera focuses
continuously while shutter-release button is
pressed halfway.
At default settings, shutter
can only be released if camera is able to focus,
but Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority
selection, 0248) can be changed to allow the
shutter to be released at any time.
MF Manual focus Focus manually (088).
79More on Photography
1Display focus mode options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current focus mode in the information
display and press J.
2Choose a focus mode.
Highlight a focus mode and press J.
APredictive Focus Tracking
In AF-C mode or when continuous-servo autofocus is selected in AF-A
mode, the camera will initiate predictive focus tracking if the subject
moves toward the camera while the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway.
This allows the camera to track focus while attempting to
predict where the subject will be when the shutter is released.
DContinuous-Servo Autofocus
When Focus is selected for Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority
selection; 0248) and the camera is in AF-C mode or continuous-servo
autofocus is selected in AF-A mode, the camera gives higher priority to
focus response (has a wider focus range) than in AF-S mode, and the
shutter may be released before the in-focus indicator (I) is displayed.
P button
Information display
80 More on Photography
AGetting Good Results with Autofocus
Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below.
The shutter release may be disabled if the camera is unable to focus
under these conditions, or the in-focus indicator (I) may be displayed
and the camera may sound a beep, allowing the shutter to be released
even when the subject is not in focus.
In these cases, focus manually
(088) or use focus lock (086) to focus on another subject at the same
distance and then recompose the photograph.
There is little or no contrast between the subject and
the background.
Example: Subject is the same color as the
background.
The focus point contains objects at different
distances from the camera.
Example: Subject is inside a cage.
The subject is dominated by regular geometric
patterns.
Example: Blinds or a row of windows in a
skyscraper.
The focus point contains areas of sharply
contrasting brightness.
Example: Subject is half in the shade.
Background objects appear larger than the subject.
Example: A building is in the frame behind the
subject.
The subject contains many fine details.
Example: A field of flowers or other subjects that
are small or lack variation in brightness.
81More on Photography
AThe AF-Assist Illuminator
If the subject is poorly lit, the AF-assist
illuminator will light automatically to assist
the autofocus operation when the shutter-
release button is pressed halfway (some
restrictions apply; 0352).
Note that the
illuminator may become hot when used
multiple times in quick succession and will
turn off automatically to protect the lamp
after a period of continuous use.
Normal
function will resume after a brief pause.
AF-assist illuminator
82 More on Photography
Choosing How the Focus Point Is Selected:
AF-Area Mode
Choose how the focus point for autofocus is selected.
Note that
d (dynamic-area) and f(3D-tracking) AF-area modes are not
available when AF-S is selected for focus mode.
Option Description
cSingle-point AF
For stationary subjects. Focus point is selected
manually; camera focuses on subject in
selected focus point only.
JDynamic-area AF
(9 points)
For non-stationary subjects.
In AF-A and AF-C
focus modes, user selects focus point using multi
selector (085), but camera will focus based
on information from surrounding focus points
if subject briefly leaves selected point.
Number of focus points varies with mode
selected:
9-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when there is
time to compose photograph or when
photographing subjects that are moving
predictably (e.g., runners or race cars on a
track).
21-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when
photographing subjects that are moving
unpredictably (e.g., players at a football
game).
39-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when
photographing subjects that are moving
quickly and are hard to keep in frame (e.g.,
birds).
KDynamic-area AF
(21 points)
LDynamic-area AF
(39 points)
83More on Photography
1Display AF-area mode options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current AF-area mode in the
information display and press J.
2Choose an AF-area mode.
Highlight an option and press J.
f3D-tracking
Quickly compose pictures with subjects that
are moving erratically from side to side (e.g.,
tennis players).
In AF-A and AF-C focus modes, user
selects focus point using multi selector
(085).
If subject moves after camera has
focused, camera uses 3D-tracking to select
new focus point and keep focus locked on
original subject while shutter-release button
is pressed halfway.
eAuto-area AF Camera automatically detects subject and
selects focus point.
Option Description
P button
Information display
84 More on Photography
AAF-Area Mode
AF-area mode selections made in shooting modes other than P, S, A, or
M are reset when another shooting mode is selected.
A3D-Tracking
If subject leaves the viewfinder, remove your finger from the shutter-
release button and recompose the photograph with the subject in the
selected focus point. Note that when the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway, the colors in the area surrounding the focus point are
stored in the camera.
Consequently 3D-tracking may not produce the
desired results with subjects that are the same color as the
background.
85More on Photography
Focus Point Selection
In manual focus mode or when autofocus is combined with AF-
area modes other than e (Auto-area AF), you can choose from
39 focus points, making it possible to compose photographs
with the main subject almost anywhere in the frame.
1Choose an AF-area mode other than
e (Auto-area AF; 083).
2Return to the shooting display.
Press P to return to the shooting
display.
3Select the focus point.
Use the multi selector to select the
focus point in the viewfinder or
information display while the
standby timer is on.
Press J to select
the center focus point.
P button
Focus point
86 More on Photography
Focus Lock
Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing
in AF-A, AF-S, and AF-C focus modes (078), making it possible to
focus on a subject that will not be in a focus point in the final
composition.
If the camera is unable to focus using autofocus
(080), focus lock can also be used to recompose the
photograph after focusing on another object at the same
distance as your original subject.
Focus lock is most effective
when an option other than e (Auto-area AF) is selected for AF-
area mode (082).
1Focus.
Position the subject in the
selected focus point and
press the shutter-release
button halfway to initiate
focus.
Check that the in-
focus indicator (I) appears
in the viewfinder.
87More on Photography
2Lock focus.
AF-A and AF-C focus modes: With the
shutter-release button pressed
halfway (q), press the A (L) button
(w) to lock focus.
Focus will remain
locked while the A(L) button is
pressed, even if you later remove your
finger from the shutter-release
button.
AF-S focus mode: Focus will lock automatically when the in-focus
indicator (I) appears, and remain locked until you remove
your finger from the shutter-release button.
Focus can also
be locked by pressing the A (L) button (see above).
3Recompose the
photograph and shoot.
Focus will remain locked
between shots if you keep
the shutter-release button
pressed halfway (AF-S) or
keep the A (L) button
pressed, allowing several photographs in succession to be
taken at the same focus setting.
Do not change the distance between the camera and the
subject while focus lock is in effect.
If the subject moves,
focus again at the new distance.
AAutoexposure Lock
Pressing the A (L) button in Step 2 also locks exposure (0127).
Shutter-release button
A (L) button
88 More on Photography
Manual Focus
Manual focus can be used when autofocus is not available or
does not produce the desired results (080).
1Select manual focus.
If the lens is equipped with an A-M, M/A-M, or A/M-M mode
switch, slide the switch to M.
If the lens is not equipped a focus-mode switch, select MF
(manual focus) for Focus mode (078).
2Focus.
To focus manually, adjust the lens
focus ring until the image displayed
on the clear matte field in the
viewfinder is in focus.
Photographs
can be taken at any time, even when
the image is not in focus.
AAF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G and G VR Lenses
When an AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR or AF-P DX NIKKOR
18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G lens is used in manual focus mode, the in-focus
indicator (I) will flash in the viewfinder (or in live view, the focus point
will flash in the monitor) to warn that continuing to rotate the focus
ring in the current direction will not bring the subject into focus.
A-M mode switch M/A-M mode switch
89More on Photography
❚❚ The Electronic Rangefinder
If the lens has a maximum aperture of
f/5.6 or faster, the viewfinder focus
indicator can be used to confirm whether
the subject in the selected focus point is
in focus (the focus point can be selected
from any of the 39 focus points).
After
positioning the subject in the selected
focus point, press the shutter-release button halfway and rotate
the lens focus ring until the in-focus indicator (I) is displayed.
Note that with the subjects listed on page 80, the in-focus
indicator may sometimes be displayed when the subject is not in
focus; confirm focus in the viewfinder before shooting.
ASelecting Manual Focus with the Camera
If the lens supports M/A (autofocus with
manual override) or A/M (autofocus with
manual override/AF priority), manual focus
can also be selected by setting the camera
focus mode to MF (manual focus; 078).
Focus can then be adjusted manually,
regardless of the mode selected with the
lens.
AFocal Plane Position
The position of the focal plane is
indicated by the focal plane mark on the
camera body.
The distance between the
lens mounting flange and the focal plane
is 46.5 mm (1.83 in.).
Focal plane mark
46.5
mm
90 More on Photography
Together, image quality and size determine how much space
each photograph occupies on the memory card.
Larger, higher
quality images can be printed at larger sizes but also require
more memory, meaning that fewer such images can be stored
on the memory card (0399).
Image Quality
Choose a file format and compression ratio (image quality).
Image Quality and Size
Option File type Description
NEF (RAW) +
JPEG fine
NEF/
JPEG
Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image
and one fine-quality JPEG image.
NEF (RAW) +
JPEG normal
Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image
and one normal-quality JPEG image.
NEF (RAW) +
JPEG basic
Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image
and one basic-quality JPEG image.
NEF (RAW) NEF
Raw data from the image sensor are saved
without additional processing.
Settings such as
white balance and contrast can be adjusted after
shooting.
JPEG fine
JPEG
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
roughly 1 : 4 (fine quality).
JPEG normal Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
roughly 1 : 8 (normal quality).
JPEG basic Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
roughly 1 : 16 (basic quality).
ANEF (RAW) + JPEG
When photographs taken at NEF (RAW) + JPEG are viewed on the
camera, only the JPEG image will be displayed.
When photographs
taken at these settings are deleted, both NEF and JPEG images will be
deleted.
91More on Photography
1Display image quality options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current image quality in the
information display and press J.
2Choose a file type.
Highlight an option and press J.
ANEF (RAW) Images
Note that the option selected for image size does not affect the size of
NEF (RAW) images.
White balance bracketing (0148), high dynamic
range (HDR, 0135), and Date stamp (0256) are not available at
image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW)+JPEG.
NEF (RAW) images can be viewed on the camera or using software
such as ViewNX 2 or Capture NX-D (0210).
JPEG copies of NEF (RAW)
images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the
retouch menu (0289).
P button
Information display
92 More on Photography
Image Size
Choose a size for JPEG images:
1Display image size options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current image size in the information
display and press J.
2Choose an image size.
Highlight an option and press J.
Image size Size (pixels) Print size (cm/in.)*
# Large 6000 × 4000 50.8 × 33.9/20 × 13.3
$ Medium 4496 × 3000 38.1 × 25.4/15.0 × 10
% Small 2992 × 2000 25.3 × 16.9/10 × 6.7
*Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi.
Print size in inches equals
image size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch (dpi;
1 inch=approximately 2.54 cm).
93More on Photography
The camera supports a variety of flash modes for photographing
poorly lit or backlit subjects.
Auto Pop-up Modes
In i, k, p, n, o, s, w, S, T, U, and ' modes, the built-in flash
automatically pops up and fires as required.
1Choose a flash mode.
Keeping the M (Y) button pressed, rotate the command dial
until the desired flash mode appears in the information
display.
2Take pictures.
The flash will pop up as
required when the shutter-
release button is pressed
halfway, and fire when a
photograph is taken.
If the
flash does not pop up
automatically, DO NOT attempt to raise it by hand.
Failure to
observe this precaution could damage the flash.
Using the Built-in Flash
M (Y) button Command dial Information display
+
94 More on Photography
❚❚ Flash Modes
The following flash modes are available:
•No (auto): When lighting is poor or the subject is backlit,
the flash pops up automatically when the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway and fires as required.
Not available
in o mode.
•Njo (auto + red-eye reduction): Use for portraits. The
flash pops up and fires as required, but before it fires the red-
eye reduction lamp lights to help reduce “red-eye.”
Not
available in o mode.
•Njr (auto slow sync + red-eye reduction): As for auto
with red-eye reduction, except that slow shutter speeds are
used to capture background lighting.
Use for portraits taken
at night or under low light.
Available in o mode.
•Nr (auto slow sync): Slow shutter speeds are used to
capture background lighting in shots taken at night or under
low light.
Available in o mode.
•j (flash off): The flash does not fire.
AThe Information Display
Flash mode can also be selected in the
information display (08).
95More on Photography
Manual Pop-up Modes
In P, S, A, M, and 0 modes, the flash must be raised manually. The
flash will not fire if it is not raised.
1Raise the flash.
Press the M (Y) button to raise the
flash.
2Choose a flash mode (P, S, A, and M modes only).
Keeping the M (Y) button pressed, rotate the command dial
until the desired flash mode appears in the information
display.
3Take pictures.
The flash will fire whenever a picture is taken.
M (Y) button Command dial Information display
M (Y) button
+
96 More on Photography
❚❚ Flash Modes
The following flash modes are available:
•N (fill flash): The flash fires with every shot.
•Nj (red-eye reduction): Use for portraits. The flash fires with
every shot, but before it fires, the red-eye reduction lamp
lights to help reduce “red-eye.”
Not available in 0 mode.
•Njp (slow sync + red-eye): As for “red-eye reduction”,
above, except that shutter speed slows automatically to
capture background lighting at night or under low light.
Use
when you want to include background lighting in portraits.
Not available in modes S, M, and 0.
•Np (slow sync): As for “fill flash”, above, except that
shutter speed slows automatically to capture background
lighting at night or under low light.
Use when you want to
capture both subject and background.
Not available in
modes S, M, and 0.
•Nt (rear-curtain + slow sync): As for “rear-curtain sync”,
below, except that shutter speed slows automatically to
capture background lighting at night or under low light.
Use
when you want to capture both subject and background.
Not
available in modes S, M, and 0.
•Nq (rear-curtain sync): The flash fires just before the
shutter closes, creating a stream of light behind moving light
sources as shown below at right.
Not available in modes P, A,
and 0.
Front-curtain sync Rear-curtain sync
97More on Photography
ALowering the Built-in Flash
To save power when the flash is not in use,
press it gently downward until the latch
clicks into place.
AThe Built-in Flash
For information on the lenses that can be used with the built-in flash,
see page 320.
Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows.
The flash has a
minimum range of 0.6 m (2 ft) and can not be used in the macro range
of zoom lenses with a macro function.
The shutter release may be briefly disabled to protect the flash after it
has been used for several consecutive shots.
The flash can be used
again after a short pause.
98 More on Photography
AShutter Speeds Available with the Built-in Flash
Shutter speed is restricted to the following ranges when the built-in
flash is used:
Mode Shutter speed
i, p, n, s, w, 0, S, T, U, '1/200–1/60 s
k1/200–1/30 s
o1/200–1 s
P, S, A1/200–30 s
M1/200–30 s, Bulb, Time
AAperture, Sensitivity, and Flash Range
Flash range varies with sensitivity (ISO equivalency) and aperture.
Aperture at ISO equivalent of Approximate range
100 200 400 800 1600 3200 6400 12800 mft
1.4 22.8 4 5.6 8 11 16 1.0–8.5 3ft 4in.–27ft 10in.
22.8 45.6 811 16 22 0.7–6.0 2ft 4in.–19ft 8in.
2.8 45.6 811 16 22 32 0.6–4.2 2ft–13ft 9in.
45.6 811 16 22 32 —0.6–3.0 2ft–9ft 10in.
5.6 811 16 22 32 — — 0.6–2.1 2ft–6ft 10in.
811 16 22 32 — — — 0.6–1.5 2ft–4ft 11in.
11 16 22 32 — — — — 0.6–1.1 2ft–3ft 7in.
16 22 32 — — — — — 0.6–0.7 2ft–2ft 4in.
99More on Photography
The camera’s sensitivity to light can be adjusted according to the
amount of light available.
The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less
light needed to make an exposure, allowing higher shutter
speeds or smaller apertures.
Choosing Auto allows the camera
to set ISO sensitivity automatically in response to lighting
conditions; to use auto in P, S, A, and M modes, select Auto ISO
sensitivity control for the ISO sensitivity settings item in the
shooting menu (0241).
1Display ISO sensitivity options.
Press the P button, then highlight
the current ISO sensitivity in the
information display and press J.
ISO Sensitivity
Mode ISO sensitivity
i, j, %Auto
P, S, A, M100–25600 in steps of 1/3 EV
Other shooting modes Auto; 100–25600 in steps of 1/3 EV
P button
Information display
100 More on Photography
2Choose an ISO sensitivity.
Highlight an option and press J.
101More on Photography
The camera is equipped to take photographs automatically at
preset intervals.
1Select Interval timer shooting.
Highlight Interval timer shooting in
the shooting menu and press 2 to
display interval timer settings.
Interval Timer Photography
DBefore Shooting
Before beginning interval timer photography, take a test shot at
current settings and view the results in the monitor.
To ensure that
shooting starts at the desired time, check that the camera clock is set
correctly (0275).
Use of a tripod is recommended.
Mount the camera on a tripod before
shooting begins.
To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be sure
the battery is fully charged.
102 More on Photography
2Adjust interval timer settings.
Choose a start option, interval, number of shots per interval,
and exposure smoothing option.
•To choose a start option:
To start shooting immediately, select Now.
To start
shooting at a chosen date and time, select Choose start
day and start time, then choose the date and time and
press J.
•To choose the interval between shots:
Highlight Start options and
press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
Highlight Interval and
press 2.
Choose an interval (hours,
minutes, and seconds) and
press J.
103More on Photography
•To choose the number of intervals:
•To enable or disable exposure smoothing:
Selecting On allows the camera to adjust exposure to match
previous shot in modes other than M (note that exposure
smoothing only takes effect in mode M if auto ISO sensitivity
control is on).
Highlight Number of times
and press 2.
Choose the number of intervals
and press J.
Highlight Exposure
smoothing and press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
104 More on Photography
3Start shooting.
Highlight Start and press J.
The first
series of shots will be taken at the
specified starting time, or after about
3s if Now was selected for Start
options in Step 2.
Shooting will
continue at the selected interval until all shots have been
taken; while shooting is in progress, the memory card access
lamp will flash at regular intervals.
Note that because shutter
speed and the time needed to record the image to the
memory card may vary from shot to shot, intervals may be
skipped if the camera is still in the process of recording the
previous interval; choose an interval longer than the slowest
anticipated shutter speed.
If shooting can not proceed at
current settings (for example, if a shutter speed of “Bulb” or
“Time” is currently selected in shooting mode M, the interval
is zero, or the start time is in less than a minute), a warning
will be displayed in the monitor.
105More on Photography
❚❚ Pausing Interval Timer Photography
Interval timer photography can be paused between intervals by
pressing J.
To resume shooting:
Starting Now
Starting at a Specified Time
❚❚ Ending Interval Timer Shooting
To end interval timer photography and resume normal shooting
before all the photos are taken, pause shooting and select Off in
the interval timer menu.
Highlight Restart and
press J.
For Start options,
highlight Choose start
day and start time
and press 2.
Choose a starting date
and time and press J.
Highlight Restart and
press J.
106 More on Photography
❚❚ No Photograph
The camera will skip the current interval if any of the following
situations persist for eight seconds or more after the interval was
due to start: the photograph or photographs for the previous
interval have yet to be taken, the memory card is full, or the
camera is unable to focus in AF-S or when single-servo AF is
selected in AF-A (note that the camera focuses again before each
shot).
Shooting will resume with the next interval.
DOut of Memory
If the memory card is full, the interval timer will remain active but no
pictures will be taken.
Resume shooting (0105) after deleting some
pictures or turning the camera off and inserting another memory card.
ACover the Viewfinder
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from appearing in the
photograph or interfering with exposure, we recommend that you
cover the viewfinder with your hand or other objects such as an
optional eyepiece cap (0331) before taking pictures without your eye
to the viewfinder (076).
AOther Settings
Settings can not be adjusted during interval timer photography.
Regardless of the release mode selected, the camera takes one
photograph at each interval; in mode J, camera noise will be reduced.
Bracketing (0148) and high dynamic range (HDR; 0135) can not be
used.
AInterrupting Interval Timer Photography
To interrupt interval timer shooting, turn the camera off or rotate the
mode dial to a new setting.
Returning the monitor to the storage
position does not interrupt interval timer shooting.
107More on Photography
Using an Optional ML-L3 Remote Control
The optional ML-L3 remote control (0332) can be used to
reduce camera shake or for self-portraits. Before proceeding,
mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level
surface.
1Press the I (E/#) button.
2Select a remote control mode.
Highlight " (Delayed remote
(ML-L3)) or #(Quick-response
remote (ML-L3)) and press J.
3Frame the photograph.
Check focus by pressing the shutter-
release button halfway.
Remote Control Photography
I (E/#) button
108 More on Photography
4Take the photograph.
From a distance of 5 m (16 ft) or less,
aim the transmitter on the ML-L3 at
either of the infrared receivers on the
camera (01, 2) and press the ML-L3
shutter-release button.
In delayed
remote mode, the self-timer lamp will
light for about two seconds before the shutter is released.
In
quick-response remote mode, the self-timer lamp will flash
after the shutter has been released.
Note that the timer may not start or a photograph may not be
taken if the camera is unable to focus or in other situations in
which the shutter can not be released.
ABefore Using the ML-L3 Remote Control
Before using the ML-L3 for the first time, remove the clear plastic
battery-insulator sheet.
ACover the Viewfinder
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from appearing in the
photograph or interfering with exposure, we recommend that you
cover the viewfinder with your hand or other objects such as an
optional eyepiece cap (0331) before taking pictures without your eye
to the viewfinder (076).
AThe Camera Shutter-Release Button/Other Remote Control Devices
If an ML-L3 remote release mode is selected and the shutter is released
by any means other than an ML-L3 remote control (for example, the
camera shutter-release button or the shutter button on an optional
remote cord or wireless remote controller), the camera will function in
single-frame release mode.
109More on Photography
AExiting Remote Control Mode
Remote control mode is cancelled automatically if no photograph is
taken before the time selected for Custom Setting c4 (Remote on
duration (ML-L3), 0254).
Remote control mode will also be
cancelled if the camera is turned off, a two-button reset is performed
(0110), or shooting options are reset using Reset shooting menu.
AUsing the Built-in Flash
Before taking a photograph with the flash in manual pop-up modes
(095), press the M(Y) button to raise the flash and wait for the M
indicator to be displayed in the viewfinder (044).
Shooting will be
interrupted if the flash is raised after the shutter-release button on the
ML-L3 is pressed.
If the flash is required, the camera will only respond
to the ML-L3 shutter-release button once the flash has charged.
In
auto pop-up modes, the flash will begin charging when a remote
control mode is selected; once the flash is charged, it will automatically
pop up and fire when required.
AWireless Remote Controllers
Remote control is also available with various combinations of WR-R10,
WR-T10, and WR-1 wireless remote controllers (0332), when the
shutter-release buttons on the wireless remote controllers perform the
same functions as the camera shutter-release button.
For more
information, see the manual provided with the remote controllers.
110 More on Photography
The camera settings listed below
and on page 112 can be restored
to default values by holding the
G and R buttons down
together for more than two
seconds (these buttons are
marked by a green dot).
The
information display turns off briefly while settings are reset.
❚❚ Settings Accessible from the Information Display
Restoring Default Settings
Option Default 0
Image quality JPEG normal 90
Image size Large 92
Auto bracketing
P, S, A, MOff 148
HDR (high dynamic range)
P, S, A, MOff 135
Active D-Lighting
P, S, A, MAuto 133
White balance
P, S, A, MAuto1137
ISO sensitivity
P, S, A, M100 99
Other shooting modes Auto
Picture Control settings
P, S, A, MUnmodified 2155
1 Fine-tuning is also reset.
2 Current Picture Control only.
G button R button
111More on Photography
Focus mode
Viewfinder
Shooting modes other than %AF-A 78
Live view/movie AF-S 164
AF-area mode
Viewfinder
n, x, 0, 1, 2, 3Single-point AF
82
m, wDynamic-area AF (39 points)
i, j, k, l, p, o, r, s, t, u, v, y, z, S,
T, U, ', 3, P, S, A, MAuto-area AF
Live view/movie
k, l, p, o, s, t, u, v, x, y, zFace-priority AF
166
m, r, w, %, S, T, U, ', 3, 1, 2, 3, P, S,
A, MWide-area AF
n, 0Normal-area AF
Metering
P, S, A, MMatrix metering 125
Flash mode
i, k, p, n, w, S, T, 'Auto
94,
96
oAuto slow sync
sAuto+red-eye reduction
UFlash off
P, S, A, MFill flash
Flash compensation
h, P, S, A, MOff 131
Exposure compensation
h, %, P, S, A, MOff 129
Option Default 0
112 More on Photography
❚❚ Other Settings
Option Default 0
NEF (RAW) recording 14-bit 240
Exposure delay mode Off 254
Release mode
m, wContinuous H 71
Other shooting modes Single frame
Focus point Center 85
AE/AF lock hold
Shooting modes other than i and jOff 267
Flexible program
POff 116
Special effects mode
U
Thickness 66
'
Vividness 0 67
Vignetting 0
(
Orientation Landscape 68
Width Normal
3
Color Off 69
Color range 3
113P, S, A, and M Modes
P, S, A, and M Modes
P, S, A, and M modes offer different degrees of
control over shutter speed and aperture:
Shutter Speed and Aperture
Mode Description
PProgrammed auto
(0115)
Recommended for snapshots and in other
situations in which there is little time to
adjust camera settings.
Camera sets
shutter speed and aperture for optimal
exposure.
SShutter-priority auto
(0117)
Use to freeze or blur motion.
User chooses
shutter speed; camera selects aperture for
best results.
AAperture-priority auto
(0118)
Use to blur background or bring both
foreground and background into focus.
User chooses aperture; camera selects
shutter speed for best results.
MManual (0119)
User controls both shutter speed and
aperture.
Set shutter speed to “Bulb” or
“Time” for long time-exposures.
114 P, S, A, and M Modes
AShutter Speed and Aperture
Shutter speed and aperture are shown in the viewfinder and
information display.
Shutter speed
Aperture
Fast shutter speeds (1/1600 s in this
example) freeze motion.
Slow shutter speeds (here 1 s) blur
motion.
Large apertures (such as f/5.6;
remember, the lower the f-number,
the larger the aperture) blur details
in front of and behind the main
subject.
Small apertures (f/22 in this case)
bring both background and
foreground into focus.
115P, S, A, and M Modes
Mode P (Programmed Auto)
This mode is recommended
for snapshots or whenever
you want to leave the camera
in charge of shutter speed and
aperture.
The camera
automatically adjusts shutter
speed and aperture for
optimal exposure in most
situations.
To take pictures in programmed auto mode, rotate the mode
dial to P.
Mode dial
116 P, S, A, and M Modes
AFlexible Program
In mode P, different combinations of shutter speed and aperture can
be selected by rotating the command dial (“flexible program”).
Rotate
the dial right for large apertures (low f-numbers) and fast shutter
speeds, left for small apertures (high f-numbers) and slow shutter
speeds.
All combinations produce the same exposure.
Rotate right to blur background details or
freeze motion.
Command dial
Rotate left to increase depth of field or blur
motion.
While flexible program is in effect, a U (R)
indicator appears in the viewfinder and
information display.
To restore default
shutter speed and aperture settings, rotate
the command dial until the indicator is no
longer displayed, choose another mode, or
turn the camera off.
117P, S, A, and M Modes
Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto)
This mode lets you control shutter speed: choose fast shutter
speeds to “freeze” motion, slow shutter speeds to suggest
motion by blurring moving objects.
The camera automatically
adjusts aperture for optimal exposure.
To choose a shutter speed:
1Rotate the mode dial to S.
2Choose a shutter speed.
Rotate the command dial to choose the desired shutter
speed: rotate right for faster speeds, left for slower speeds.
Fast shutter speeds (e.g., 1/1600 s)
freeze motion.
Slow shutter speeds (e.g., 1 s) blur
motion.
Mode dial
Command dial
118 P, S, A, and M Modes
Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto)
In this mode, you can adjust aperture to control depth of field
(the distance in front of and behind the main subject that
appears to be in focus).
The camera automatically adjusts
shutter speed for optimal exposure.
To choose an aperture:
1Rotate the mode dial to A.
2Choose an aperture.
Rotate the command dial left for larger apertures (lower f-
numbers), right for smaller apertures (higher f-numbers).
Large apertures (low f-numbers, e.g.
f/5.6) blur details in front of and
behind the main subject.
Small apertures (high f-numbers, e.g.
f/22) bring the foreground and
background into focus.
Mode dial
Command dial
119P, S, A, and M Modes
Mode M (Manual)
In manual mode, you control both shutter speed and aperture.
Shutter speeds of “Bulb” and “Time” are available for long time-
exposures of moving lights, the stars, night scenery, or fireworks
(0121).
1Rotate the mode dial to M.
Mode dial
120 P, S, A, and M Modes
2Choose aperture and shutter speed.
Checking the exposure indicator (see below), adjust shutter
speed and aperture.
Shutter speed is selected by rotating the
command dial (right for faster speeds, left for slower).
To
adjust aperture, keep the E (N) button pressed while
rotating the command dial (left for larger apertures/lower
f-numbers and right for smaller apertures/higher f-numbers).
Shutter speed
Command dial
Aperture
E (N) button Command dial
AThe Exposure Indicator
If a CPU lens is attached (0314) and a shutter speed other than “Bulb”
or “Time” is selected, the exposure indicator in the viewfinder and
information display shows whether the photograph would be under-
or over-exposed at current settings.
Optimal exposure Underexposed by 1/3EV Overexposed by over 2 EV
121P, S, A, and M Modes
Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only)
Select the following shutter
speeds for long time-exposures
of moving lights, the stars, night
scenery, or fireworks.
•Bulb (A): The shutter
remains open while the
shutter-release button is
pressed all the way down.
To
prevent blur, use a tripod or an
optional wireless remote controller (0332) or remote cord
(0333).
•Time (&): Start the exposure using the shutter-release button
on the camera or on an optional remote control, remote cord,
or wireless remote controller.
The shutter remains open until
the button is pressed a second time.
Before proceeding, mount the camera on a tripod or place it on
a stable, level surface.
To prevent light entering via the
viewfinder from appearing in the photograph or interfering with
exposure, we recommend that you cover the viewfinder with
your hand or other objects such as an optional eyepiece cap
(0331) before taking pictures without your eye to the
viewfinder (076).
To prevent loss of power before the exposure
is complete, use a fully charged battery.
Note that noise (bright
spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be present in
long exposures.
Bright spots and fog can be reduced by
choosing On for Long exposure NR in the shooting menu
(0243).
Length of exposure: 35 s
Aperture: f/25
122 P, S, A, and M Modes
❚❚ Bulb
1Rotate the mode dial to M.
2Choose the shutter speed.
Rotate the command dial to choose a
shutter speed of Bulb (A).
3Take the photograph.
After focusing, press the shutter-release button on the
camera, optional wireless remote controller or remote cord
all the way down.
Take your finger from the shutter-release
button when the exposure is complete.
Mode dial
123P, S, A, and M Modes
❚❚ Time
1Rotate the mode dial to M.
2Choose the shutter speed.
Rotate the command dial left to
choose a shutter speed of “Time” (&).
3Open the shutter.
After focusing, press the shutter-release button on the
camera or optional remote control, remote cord, or wireless
remote controller all the way down.
4Close the shutter.
Repeat the operation performed in Step 3.
Mode dial
Command dial
124 P, S, A, and M Modes
AML-L3 Remote Controls
If you will be using an ML-L3 remote control, select one of the
following remote control modes as described on page 107:
"(Delayed remote (ML-L3)) or #(Quick-response remote
(ML-L3)).
Note that if you are using an ML-L3 remote control, pictures
will be taken in “Time” mode even when “Bulb”/A is selected for
shutter speed.
The exposure starts when the shutter-release button on
the remote control is pressed and ends after 30 minutes or when the
button is pressed again.
125P, S, A, and M Modes
Metering
Choose how the camera sets exposure.
1Display metering options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current metering method in the
information display and press J.
Exposure
Method Description
LMatrix metering
Produces natural results in most situations.
The
camera meters a wide area of the frame and sets
exposure according to tone distribution, color,
composition, and distance.
MCenter-weighted
metering
Classic meter for portraits.
Camera meters entire
frame but assigns greatest weight to center area.
Recommended when using filters with an
exposure factor (filter factor) over 1×.
NSpot metering
Choose this mode to ensure that subject will be
correctly exposed, even when background is
much brighter or darker.
Camera meters current
focus point; use to meter off-center subjects.
P button
Information display
126 P, S, A, and M Modes
2Choose a metering method.
Highlight an option and press J.
ASpot Metering
If e (Auto-area AF) is selected for AF-area mode during viewfinder
photography (082), the camera will meter the center focus point.
127P, S, A, and M Modes
Autoexposure Lock
Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after using
M(Center-weighted metering) and N(Spot metering) to
meter exposure; note that autoexposure lock is not available in
i or j mode.
1Meter exposure.
Press the shutter-release
button halfway.
2Lock exposure.
With the shutter-release button
pressed halfway (q) and the subject
positioned in the focus point, press
the A (L) button (w) to lock
exposure.
While exposure lock is in effect, an AE-L
indicator will appear in the viewfinder.
3Recompose the
photograph.
Keeping the A (L) button
pressed, recompose the
photograph and shoot.
Shutter-release
button
A (L) button
128 P, S, A, and M Modes
AAdjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture
While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be adjusted
without altering the metered value for exposure:
Mode Setting
Programmed auto Shutter speed and aperture
(flexible program; 0116)
Shutter-priority auto Shutter speed
Aperture-priority auto Aperture
The metering method itself can not be changed while exposure lock is
in effect.
129P, S, A, and M Modes
Exposure Compensation
Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value
suggested by the camera, making pictures brighter or darker
(0367).
In general, positive values make the subject brighter
while negative values make it darker.
It is most effective when
used with M(Center-weighted metering) or N (Spot
metering) (0125).
To choose a value for exposure compensation, keep the E (N)
button pressed and rotate the command dial until the desired
value is selected in the viewfinder or information display.
–1 EV No exposure
compensation
+1 EV
E (N) button Command dial Information display
–0.3EV +2EV
+
130 P, S, A, and M Modes
Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure
compensation to ±0.
Except in h and % modes, exposure
compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off (in
h and % modes, exposure compensation will be reset when
another mode is selected or the camera is turned off).
AThe Information Display
Exposure compensation options can also be
accessed from the information display
(010).
AMode M
In mode M, exposure compensation affects only the exposure
indicator.
AUsing a Flash
When a flash is used, exposure compensation affects both background
exposure and flash level.
ABracketing
For information on automatically varying exposure over a series of
shots, see page 148.
131P, S, A, and M Modes
Flash Compensation
Flash compensation is used to alter flash output from the level
suggested by the camera, changing the brightness of the main
subject relative to the background.
Flash output can be
increased to make the main subject appear brighter, or reduced
to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections (0368).
Keep the M (Y) and E (N) buttons pressed and rotate the
command dial until the desired value is selected in the
viewfinder or information display.
In general, positive values
make the main subject seem brighter while negative values
make it seem darker.
Normal flash output can be restored by
setting flash compensation to ±0.
Except in h mode, flash
compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off (in
h mode, flash compensation will be reset when another
mode is selected or the camera is turned off).
M (Y) button
Command dial Information display
E (N) button
–0.3 EV +1 EV
+
132 P, S, A, and M Modes
AThe Information Display
Flash compensation options can also be
accessed from the information display
(010).
AOptional Flash Units
Flash compensation is also available with optional flash units that
support the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS; see page 323).
The
flash compensation selected with the optional flash unit is added to
the flash compensation selected with the camera.
133P, S, A, and M Modes
Active D-Lighting
Active D-Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows,
creating photographs with natural contrast.
Use for high
contrast scenes, for example when photographing brightly lit
outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of
shaded subjects on a sunny day.
Active D-Lighting is not
recommended in mode M; in other modes, it is most effective
when used with L(Matrix metering; 0125).
1Display Active D-Lighting options.
Press the P button, then highlight
Active D-Lighting in the information
display and press J.
Preserving Detail in Highlights and
Shadows
Active D-Lighting: ! Off Active D-Lighting: Y Auto
P button
Information display
134 P, S, A, and M Modes
2Choose an option.
Highlight an option and press J
(0367).
DActive D-Lighting
Noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) may appear in
photographs taken with Active D-Lighting.
Uneven shading may be
visible with some subjects.
A“Active D-Lighting” Versus “D-Lighting”
Active D-Lighting adjusts exposure before shooting to optimize the
dynamic range, while the D-Lighting option in the retouch menu
(0294) brightens shadows in images after shooting.
ABracketing
For information on automatically varying Active D-Lighting over a
series of shots, see page 148.
135P, S, A, and M Modes
High Dynamic Range (HDR)
High Dynamic Range (HDR) combines two exposures to form a
single image that captures a wide range of tones from shadows
to highlights, even with high-contrast subjects.
HDR is most
effective when used with L(Matrix metering) (0125).
It can
not be used to record NEF (RAW) images.
While HDR is in effect,
the flash can not be used and continuous shooting is not
available.
1Display HDR (high dynamic range)
options.
Press the P button, then highlight
HDR (high dynamic range) in the
information display and press J.
First exposure (darker) Second exposure
(brighter)
Combined HDR image
+
P button
Information display
136 P, S, A, and M Modes
2Choose an option.
Highlight vAuto, 2Extra high,
SHigh, TNormal, ULow, or
6Off and press J.
When an option other than 6Off is
selected, u will be displayed in the
viewfinder.
3Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
The camera takes two exposures
when the shutter-release button is
pressed all the way down.
“lu”
will flash in the viewfinder while the images are combined; no
photographs can be taken until recording is complete.
HDR
turns off automatically after the photograph is taken; to turn
off HDR before shooting, rotate the mode dial to a setting
other than P, S, A, or M.
DFraming HDR Photographs
The edges of the image may be cropped out.
The desired results may
not be achieved if the camera or subject moves during shooting.
Use
of a tripod is recommended.
Depending on the scene, the effect may
not be visible, shadows may appear around bright objects, or halos
may appear around dark objects.
Uneven shading may be visible with
some subjects.
137P, S, A, and M Modes
White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of
the light source.
Auto white balance is recommended for most
light sources; other values can be selected if necessary
according to the type of source:
1Display white balance options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current white balance setting in the
information display and press J.
White Balance
Option Description
vAuto Automatic white balance adjustment.
Recommended in most situations.
JIncandescent Use under incandescent lighting.
IFluorescent Use with the light sources listed on page 138.
HDirect sunlight Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight.
NFlash Use with the flash.
GCloudy Use in daylight under overcast skies.
MShade Use in daylight with subjects in the shade.
LPreset manual Measure white balance or copy white balance
from existing photo (0142).
P button
Information display
138 P, S, A, and M Modes
2Choose a white balance option.
Highlight an option and press J.
AThe Shooting Menu
White balance can be selected using the
White balance option in the shooting menu
(0236), which also can be used to fine-tune
white balance (0140) or measure a value
for preset white balance (0142).
The IFluorescent option in the White
balance menu can be used to select the
light source from the bulb types shown at
right.
ATouch Menu Navigation
Tap an option in the white balance menu once to highlight it and again
to select it and either display a menu of bulb types (IFluorescent) or
return to the shooting menu.
139P, S, A, and M Modes
AColor Temperature
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other
conditions.
Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a
light source, defined with reference to the temperature to which an
object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same
wavelengths.
While light sources with a color temperature in the
neighborhood of 5000–5500 K appear white, light sources with a lower
color temperature, such as incandescent light bulbs, appear slightly
yellow or red.
Light sources with a higher color temperature appear
tinged with blue.
“Warmer” (redder) colors “Cooler” (bluer) colors
qI (sodium-vapor lamps): 2700 K
wJ (incandescent)/I (warm-white fluorescent.): 3000 K
eI (white fluorescent): 3700 K
rI (cool-white fluorescent): 4200 K
tI (day white fluorescent): 5000 K
yH (direct sunlight): 5200 K
uN (flash): 5400 K
iG (cloudy): 6000 K
oI (daylight fluorescent): 6500 K
!0 I (high temp. mercury-vapor): 7200 K
!1 M (shade): 8000 K
Note: All figures are approximate.
ABracketing
For information on automatically varying white balance settings over a
series of shots, see page 148.
3000 4000 5000 6000 8000 10000 [ K ]
q w retyui o!0 !1
140 P, S, A, and M Modes
Fine-Tuning White Balance
White balance can be “fine-tuned” to compensate for variations
in the color of the light source or to introduce a deliberate color
cast into an image.
White balance is fine-tuned using the White
balance option in the shooting menu.
1Display fine-tuning options.
Highlight a white balance option and
press 2 (if Fluorescent is selected,
highlight the desired lighting type
and press 2; note that fine-tuning is
not available with Preset manual).
2Fine-tune white balance.
Use the multi selector to fine-tune
white balance.
White balance can be
fine-tuned on the amber (A)–blue (B)
axis in steps of 0.5 and the green (G)–
magenta (M) axis in steps of 0.25.
The
horizontal (amber-blue) axis
corresponds to color temperature,
while the vertical (green-magenta)
axis has the similar effects to the corresponding color
compensation (CC) filters.
The horizontal axis is ruled in
increments equivalent to about 5 mired, the vertical axis in
increments of about 0.05 diffuse density units.
3Save changes and exit.
Press J.
141P, S, A, and M Modes
AWhite Balance Fine-Tuning
The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative, not absolute.
For
example, moving the cursor to B (blue) when a “warm” setting such as
J (incandescent) is selected will make photographs slightly “colder”
but will not actually make them blue.
ATouch Fine-Tuning
To fine-tune an option in the white balance menu using the touch
screen, tap the option once to highlight it and then tap the 2 Adjust
button to view the fine-tuning display.
To choose a value, tap the
coordinate display or the u, v, x, or y icons.
Tap 0 OK to return to the
shooting menu once white balance has been adjusted to your
satisfaction.
A“Mired”
Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference
in color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color
temperatures.
For example, a change of 1000 K produces a much
greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K.
Mired, calculated by
multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 106, is a measure of
color temperature that takes such variation into account, and as such is
the unit used in color-temperature compensation filters.
E.g.:
•4000 K–3000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=83 mired
•7000 K–6000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=24 mired
142 P, S, A, and M Modes
Preset Manual
Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance
settings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for
light sources with a strong color cast.
Two methods are available
for setting preset white balance:
❚❚ Measuring a Value for Preset White Balance
1Light a reference object.
Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that
will be used in the final photograph.
2Display white balance options.
Highlight White balance in the
shooting menu and press 2 to display
white balance options.
Highlight
Preset manual and press 2.
3Select Measure.
Highlight Measure and press 2.
Method Description
Measure
Neutral gray or white object is placed under lighting that
will be used in final photo and white balance measured by
camera (see below).
Use photo White balance is copied from photo on memory card
(0146).
143P, S, A, and M Modes
4Select Yes .
The menu shown at right will be
displayed; highlight Yes and press J.
The camera will enter preset
measurement mode.
When the camera is ready to measure
white balance, a flashing D (L) will
appear in the viewfinder and
information display.
5Measure white balance.
Before the indicators stop flashing,
frame the reference object so that it
fills the viewfinder and press the
shutter-release button all the way down.
No photograph will
be recorded; white balance can be measured accurately even
when the camera is not in focus.
144 P, S, A, and M Modes
6Check the results.
If the camera was able to measure a
value for white balance, the message
shown at right will be displayed and
a will flash in the viewfinder and the
camera will return to shooting mode.
To return to shooting mode
immediately, press the shutter-release
button halfway.
If lighting is too dark or too bright, the
camera may be unable to measure
white balance.
A message will appear
in the information display and a
flashing ba will appear in the
viewfinder.
Return to Step 5 and
measure white balance again.
145P, S, A, and M Modes
DMeasuring Preset White Balance
If no operations are performed while the displays are flashing, direct
measurement mode will end in the time selected for Custom Setting
c2 (Auto off timers; 0253).
DPreset White Balance
The camera can store only one value for preset white balance at a time;
the existing value will be replaced when a new value is measured.
Note that exposure is automatically increased by 1 EV when measuring
white balance; when shooting in mode M, adjust exposure so that the
exposure indicator shows ±0 (0120).
AOther Methods for Measuring Preset White Balance
To enter preset measurement mode (see above) after selecting preset
white balance in the information display (0137), press J for a few
seconds.
If white balance has been assigned to the Fn button (0265),
white balance preset measurement mode can be activated by keeping
the Fn button pressed for a few seconds after selecting preset white
balance with the Fn button and command dial.
AGray Panels
For more precise results, measure white balance using a standard gray
panel.
146 P, S, A, and M Modes
❚❚ Copying White Balance from a Photograph
Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from a
photograph on the memory card.
1Select Preset manual.
Highlight White balance in the
shooting menu and press 2 to display
white balance options.
Highlight
Preset manual and press 2.
2Select Use photo.
Highlight Use photo and press 2.
3Choose Select image.
Highlight Select image and press 2
(to skip the remaining steps and use
the image last selected for preset
white balance, select This image).
4Choose a folder.
Highlight the folder containing the
source image and press 2.
147P, S, A, and M Modes
5Highlight the source image.
To view the highlighted image full
frame, press and hold the X button.
6Copy white balance.
Press J to set preset white balance to the white balance
value for the highlighted photograph.
148 P, S, A, and M Modes
Bracketing automatically varies exposure, white balance, or
Active D-Lighting (ADL) settings slightly with each shot,
“bracketing” the current value.
Choose in situations in which it is
difficult to set exposure or white balance and there is not time to
check results and adjust settings with each shot, or to
experiment with different settings for the same subject.
1Choose a bracketing option.
Highlight e2 (Auto bracketing set) in
the Custom Settings menu and press
2.
Highlight the desired bracketing type
and press J.
Bracketing
Option Description
kAE bracketing
Vary exposure over a series of three photographs.
Shot 1:
unmodified
Shot 2: exposure
reduced
Shot 3: exposure
increased
mWB bracketing
Each time the shutter is released, the camera creates
three images, each with a different white balance.
Not available with image qualities of NEF (RAW).
!ADL bracketing Take one photo with Active D-Lighting off, and
another at the current Active D-Lighting setting.
149P, S, A, and M Modes
2Display bracketing options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current bracketing setting and press
J.
3Select a bracketing increment.
Highlight a bracketing increment and
press J. Choose from values between
0.3 and 2 EV (AE bracketing) or 1 to 3
(WB bracketing), or select ADL (ADL
bracketing).
P button
Information display
150 P, S, A, and M Modes
4Frame a photograph, focus, and
shoot.
AE bracketing: The camera will vary
exposure with each shot.
The first
shot will be taken at the value currently selected for exposure
compensation.
The bracketing increment will be subtracted
from the current value in the second shot and added in the
third shot, “bracketing” the current value.
The modified
values are reflected in the values shown for shutter speed and
aperture.
WB bracketing: Each shot is processed to create three copies,
one at the current white balance setting, one with increased
amber, and one with increased blue.
ADL bracketing: The first shot after bracketing is activated is
taken with Active D-Lighting off, the second at the current
Active D-Lighting setting (0133; if Active D-Lighting is off,
the second shot will be taken with Active D-Lighting set to
Auto).
In continuous high-speed and continuous low-speed release
modes, shooting will pause after each bracketing cycle.
If the
camera is turned off before all shots in the bracketing sequence
have been taken, bracketing will resume from the next shot in
the sequence when the camera is turned on.
151P, S, A, and M Modes
AThe Bracketing Progress Indicator
During AE bracketing, a bar is removed
from the bracketing progress indicator
with each shot (v>w>x).
During ADL bracketing, the setting that
will be used for the next shot is underlined
in the information display.
ADisabling Bracketing
To disable bracketing and resume normal shooting, select OFF in Step
3 (0149).
Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two-
button reset (0110).
To cancel bracketing before all frames have been
recorded, rotate the mode dial to a setting other than P, S, A, or M.
AExposure Bracketing
The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture
(mode P), aperture (mode S), or shutter speed (modes A and M).
If auto
ISO sensitivity control is enabled, the camera will automatically vary
ISO sensitivity for optimum exposure when the limits of the camera
exposure system are exceeded.
152 P, S, A, and M Modes
In P, S, A, and M modes, your choice of Picture Control determines
how pictures are processed (in other modes, the camera selects
a Picture Control automatically).
Selecting a Picture Control
Choose a Picture Control according to the subject or type of
scene.
Picture Controls
Option Description
QStandard Recommended for most situations, this option uses
standard processing for balanced results.
RNeutral
A good choice for photographs that will later be
processed or retouched, this option uses minimal
processing for natural results.
SVivid
Choose this option for photographs that emphasize
primary colors.
Pictures are enhanced for a vivid,
photoprint effect.
TMonochrome Take monochrome photographs.
ePortrait Process portraits for skin with natural texture and a
rounded feel.
fLandscape Produces vibrant landscapes and cityscapes.
qFlat
Choose for photographs that will later be
extensively processed or retouched.
Details are
preserved over a wide tone range, from highlights
to shadows.
153P, S, A, and M Modes
1Display Picture Control options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current Picture Control and press J.
2Select a Picture Control.
Highlight a Picture Control and press
J.
ATouch Menu Navigation
Picture Controls can also be selected in the shooting menu (0236).
When choosing an option from the Set Picture Control menu using
the touch screen (026), tap the option once to highlight it and again
to select it.
P button
Information display
154 P, S, A, and M Modes
Modifying Picture Controls
Existing preset or custom Picture Controls (0158) can be
modified to suit the scene or the user’s creative intent.
Choose a
balanced combination of settings using Quick adjust, or make
manual adjustments to individual settings.
1Select a Picture Control.
Highlight Set Picture Control in the
shooting menu and press 2.
Highlight the desired Picture Control
and press 2.
2Adjust settings.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired
setting and press 4 or 2 to choose a
value in increments of 1, or rotate the
command dial to choose a value in
increments of 0.25 (0155).
Repeat
this step until all settings have been adjusted, or select a
preset combination of settings by using the multi selector to
choose Quick adjust.
Default settings can be restored by
pressing the O button.
3Save changes and exit.
Press J.
Picture Controls that have been
modified from default settings are
indicated by an asterisk (“*”).
155P, S, A, and M Modes
❚❚ Picture Control Settings
Option Description
Quick adjust
Mute or heighten the effect of the selected
Picture Control (note that this resets all manual
adjustments).
Not available with Neutral,
Monochrome, Flat, or custom Picture Controls
(0158).
Manual adjustments
(all Picture Controls)
Sharpening
Control the sharpness of outlines.
Select A to
adjust sharpening automatically according to
the type of scene.
Clarity
Adjust clarity manually or select A to let the
camera adjust clarity automatically.
Depending on the scene, shadows may appear
around bright objects or halos may appear
around dark objects at some settings.
Clarity is
not applied to movies.
Contrast Adjust contrast manually or select A to let the
camera adjust contrast automatically.
Brightness Raise or lower brightness without loss of detail
in highlights or shadows.
Manual adjustments
(non-monochrome only)
Saturation
Control the vividness of colors.
Select A to
adjust saturation automatically according to
the type of scene.
Hue Adjust hue.
Manual adjustments
(monochrome only)
Filter effects Simulate the effect of color filters on
monochrome photographs (0157).
Toning Choose the tint used in monochrome
photographs (0157).
156 P, S, A, and M Modes
D“A” (Auto)
Results for auto sharpening, clarity, contrast, and saturation vary with
exposure and the position of the subject in the frame.
ASwitching Between Manual and Auto
Press the X button to switch back and forth
between manual and auto (A) settings for
sharpening, clarity, contrast, and saturation.
ACustom Picture Controls
Custom Picture Controls are created through modifications to existing
Picture Controls using the Manage Picture Control option in the
shooting menu (0158) and can be saved to a memory card for sharing
among other cameras of the same model and compatible software
(0161).
APrevious Settings
The j indicator under the value display in
the Picture Control setting menu indicates
the previous value for the setting.
Use this as
a reference when adjusting settings.
ACustom Picture Control Options
The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as
those on which the custom Picture Control was based.
AUsing the Touch Screen
To use the touch screen to modify a Picture
Control in the Set Picture Control menu,
tap the Picture Control once to highlight it
and then tap the 2 Adjust button to view
the menu shown in Step 2 on page 154.
Tap
a parameter once to highlight it and again to
display options, then use the on-screen
controls to choose a value (the multi selector can not be used).
Note
that the touch screen can only be used for this purpose if Enable is
selected for Touch controls.
157P, S, A, and M Modes
AFilter Effects (Monochrome Only)
The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on
monochrome photographs.
The following filter effects are available:
Option Description
YYellow Enhances contrast.
Can be used to tone down the
brightness of the sky in landscape photographs.
Orange produces more contrast than yellow, red
more contrast than orange.
OOrange
RRed
GGreen Softens skin tones.
Can be used for portraits.
Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more
pronounced than those produced by physical glass filters.
AToning (Monochrome Only)
Pressing 3 when Toning is selected displays
saturation options.
Press 4 or 2 to adjust
saturation in increments of 1, or rotate the
command dial to choose a value in
increments of 0.25.
Saturation control is not
available when B&W (black-and-white) is
selected.
ATouch-Screen Character Entry
To type, tap the letters in the keyboard area (you can select letters by
sliding a finger over the screen: the letters are highlighted as you touch
them and are not entered in the text area until you lift your finger).
To
position the cursor, tap directly in the text area or tap the x or y
buttons.
158 P, S, A, and M Modes
Creating Custom Picture Controls
The Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be modified
and saved as custom Picture Controls.
1Select Manage Picture Control.
Highlight Manage Picture Control in
the shooting menu and press 2.
2Select Save/edit.
Highlight Save/edit and press 2.
3Select a Picture Control.
Highlight an existing Picture Control
and press 2, or press J to proceed to
Step 5 to save a copy of the
highlighted Picture Control without
further modification.
4Edit the selected Picture Control.
See page 155 for more information.
To abandon any changes and start
over from default settings, press the O
button.
Press J when settings are
complete.
159P, S, A, and M Modes
5Select a destination.
Highlight a destination for the custom
Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) and
press 2.
6Name the Picture Control.
By default, new Picture Controls are
named by adding a two-digit number
(assigned automatically) to the name
of the existing Picture Control; to use
the default name, proceed to Step 7.
To move the cursor in the name area,
rotate the command dial.
To enter a
new letter at the current cursor
position, use the multi selector to highlight the desired
character in the keyboard area and press J.
To delete the
character at the current cursor position, press the O button.
Custom Picture Control names can be up to nineteen
characters long.
Any characters after the nineteenth will be
deleted.
7Press X.
Press X to save changes and exit.
The
new Picture Control will appear in the
Picture Control list.
Name area
Keyboard area
160 P, S, A, and M Modes
AManage Picture Control > Rename
Custom Picture Controls can be renamed at any time using the
Rename option in the Manage Picture Control menu.
AManage Picture Control > Delete
The Delete option in the Manage Picture Control menu can be used
to delete selected custom Picture Controls when they are no longer
needed.
AThe Original Picture Control Icon
The original preset Picture Control on which
the custom Picture Control is based is
indicated by an icon in the top right corner
of the edit display.
Original
Picture Control icon
161P, S, A, and M Modes
Sharing Custom Picture Controls
Custom Picture Controls created using Picture Control Utility 2, a
utility launched from ViewNX 2 or Capture NX-D (0210), can be
copied to a memory card and loaded into the camera, or custom
Picture Controls created with the camera can be copied to the
memory card to be used in compatible cameras and software
and then deleted when no longer needed.
To copy custom Picture Controls to or
from the memory card, or to delete
custom Picture Controls from the
memory card, highlight Load/Save in
the Manage Picture Control menu and
press 2.
The following options will be
displayed:
•Copy to camera: Copy custom Picture
Controls from the memory card to
custom Picture Controls C-1 through
C-9 on the camera and name them as
desired.
•Delete from card: Delete selected custom
Picture Controls from the memory card.
•Copy to card: Copy a custom Picture Control (C-1 through C-9)
from the camera to a selected destination (1 through 99) on
the memory card.
ASaving Custom Picture Controls
Up to 99 custom Picture Controls can be stored on the memory card at
any one time.
The memory card can only be used to store user-created
custom Picture Controls.
The preset Picture Controls supplied with the
camera can not be copied to the memory card, renamed, or deleted.
162 Live View
Live View
Follow the steps below to take photographs in live view.
1Rotate the live view switch.
The view through the lens will be
displayed in the monitor.
2Position the focus point.
Use the multi selector to position the
focus point over your subject as
described on page 167.
3Focus.
Press the shutter-release button
halfway.
The focus point will flash
green while the camera focuses.
If the
camera is able to focus, the focus point will be displayed in
green; if the camera is unable to focus, the focus point will
flash red (note that pictures can be taken even when the
focus point flashes red; check focus in the monitor before
shooting).
Except in i and j modes, exposure can be
locked by pressing the A (L) button.
Framing Photographs in the Monitor
Focus point
163Live View
4Take the picture.
Press the shutter-release
button the rest of the way
down.
The monitor turns
off and the memory card
access lamp lights during
recording.
Do not remove
the battery or memory card until recording is complete.
When
shooting is complete, the photograph will be displayed in the
monitor for a few seconds before the camera returns to live
view mode.
To exit, rotate the live view switch.
ALive View Zoom Preview
Press the X button to zoom in on the selected focus point to a
maximum magnification of about 8.3×.
A navigation window will
appear in a gray frame at the bottom right corner of the display.
Use
the multi selector to reposition the focus point or press W(Q) to zoom
out.
To cancel zoom, press J.
Memory card access lamp
X button Navigation window
164 Live View
Focusing in Live View
Follow the steps below to choose focus and AF-area modes and
position the focus point.
❚❚ Choosing How the Camera Focuses (Focus Mode)
The following focus modes are available in live view (note that
full-time–servo AF is not available in U, ', and ( modes):
1Display focus options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current focus mode in the information
display and press J.
Option Description
AF-S Single-servo AF For stationary subjects.
Focus locks when
shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
AF-F Full-time-servo
AF
For moving subjects.
Camera focuses
continuously until shutter-release button is
pressed.
Focus locks when shutter-release
button is pressed halfway.
MF Manual focus Focus manually (0165).
P button
Information display
165Live View
2Choose a focus option.
Highlight an option and press J.
AManual Focus
To focus in manual focus mode (088),
rotate the lens focus ring until the subject is
in focus.
To magnify the view in the monitor for
precise focus, press the X button (0163).
X button
166 Live View
❚❚ Choosing How the Camera Picks the Area (AF-Area Mode)
In modes other than i, j, and (, the following AF-area modes
can be selected in live view (note that subject-tracking AF is not
available in %, U, ', and 3 modes):
1Display AF-area modes.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current AF-area mode in the
information display and press J.
Option Description
6Face-priority AF
Use for portraits.
The camera
automatically detects and focuses on
portrait subjects.
7Wide-area AF
Use for hand-held shots of landscapes and
other non-portrait subjects.
Use the multi
selector to select the focus point.
8Normal-area AF Use for pin-point focus on a selected spot
in the frame.
A tripod is recommended.
9Subject-tracking AF Use if you want focus to track a selected
subject.
P button
Information display
167Live View
2Choose an AF-area mode.
Highlight an option and press J.
3Choose the focus point.
6 (face-priority AF): A double yellow
border will be displayed when the
camera detects a portrait subject (if
multiple faces are detected, the
camera will focus on the closest
subject; to choose a different subject,
use the multi selector).
If the camera
can no longer detect the subject (because, for example, the
subject has turned to face away from the camera), the border
will no longer be displayed.
7/8 (wide- and normal-area AF): Use the
multi selector to move the focus point
anywhere in the frame, or press J to
position the focus point in the center
of the frame.
9 (subject-tracking AF): Position the
focus point over your subject and
press J.
The focus point will track the
selected subject as it moves through
the frame.
To end focus tracking,
press J a second time.
Focus point
Focus point
Focus point
168 Live View
The Live View Display
Item Description 0
q Shooting mode The mode currently selected with
the mode dial.
38, 54,
61, 113
w Manual movie settings
indicator
Displayed when On is selected for
Manual movie settings in mode
M.
179
e Time remaining
The amount of time remaining
before live view ends
automatically.
Displayed if
shooting will end in 30 s or less.
172, 180
r Wind noise reduction
Displayed when On is selected for
Movie settings > Wind noise
reduction in the shooting menu.
178
t Microphone sensitivity Microphone sensitivity for movie
recording. 178
y Sound level
Sound level for audio recording.
Displayed in red if level is too high;
adjust microphone sensitivity
accordingly.
178
q
w
e
t
r
y
169Live View
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.
Item Description 0
u Movie frame size The frame size of movies recorded
in movie mode. 177
i Focus mode The current focus mode. 164
o AF-area mode The current AF-area mode. 166
!0 “No movie” icon Indicates that movies can not be
recorded. —
!1 Time remaining (movie
mode)
The recording time remaining in
movie mode. 175
!2 Focus point
The current focus point.
The
display varies with the option
selected for AF-area mode
(0166).
167
!3 Exposure indicator
Indicates whether the photograph
would be under- or over-exposed
at current settings (mode M only).
120
!3
!1
!2
!0
oiu
170 Live View
ALive View/Movie Recording Display Options
Press the R button to cycle through display
options as shown below.
Circled areas
indicate edges of movie frame crop.
Show detailed photo
indicators
Show movie indicators
(0174) *
Show basic photo indicators *Hide indicators*
Framing grid*
* A crop showing the area recorded is displayed during movie
recording when frame sizes other than 640 × 424 are selected for
Movie settings > Frame size/frame rate in the shooting menu
(0177; the area outside the movie frame crop is grayed out when
movie indicators are displayed).
171Live View
ACamera Settings
Except when movie indicators are displayed,
you can access the following live view
photography settings by pressing the P
button: image quality (090), image size
(092), bracketing increment (0149), HDR
(0135), Active D-Lighting (0133), white
balance (0137), ISO sensitivity (099),
Picture Controls (0152), focus mode
(0164), AF-area mode (0166), metering
(0125), flash mode (094, 96), flash
compensation (0131), and exposure
compensation (0129).
When movie
indicators are displayed, movie settings can
be adjusted (0178).
AExposure
Depending on the scene, exposure may differ from that which would
be obtained when live view is not used.
Metering in live view is
adjusted to suit the live view display, producing photographs with
exposure close to what is seen in the monitor (note that exposure
compensation can only be previewed in the monitor at values
between +3 EV and –3 EV).
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder
from appearing in the photograph or interfering with exposure, we
recommend that you cover the viewfinder with your hand or other
objects such as an optional eyepiece cap (0331) before taking
pictures without your eye to the viewfinder (076).
AHDMI
When the camera is attached to an HDMI video device, the video
device will display the view through the lens.
If the device supports
HDMI-CEC, select Off for the HDMI > Device control option in the
setup menu (0223) before shooting in live view.
P button
Information display
172 Live View
DShooting in Live View Mode
Although it will not appear in the final picture, distortion may be
visible in the monitor if the camera is panned horizontally or an object
moves at high speed through frame.
Bright light sources may leave
after-images in the monitor when the camera is panned.
Bright spots
may also appear.
Flicker and banding visible in the monitor under
fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps can be reduced using
Flicker reduction (0281), although they may still be visible in the
final photograph at some shutter speeds.
When shooting in live view
mode, avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light
sources.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to
the camera’s internal circuitry.
Live view ends automatically when the monitor is closed (closing the
monitor does not end live view on televisions or other external
displays).
DThe Count Down Display
A count down will be displayed 30 s before live view ends
automatically (0168; the timer turns red 5 s before the auto off timer
expires (0253) or if live view is about to end to protect the internal
circuits).
Depending on shooting conditions, the timer may appear
immediately when live view is selected.
173Live View
DUsing Autofocus in Live View
Autofocus is slower in live view and the monitor may brighten or
darken while the camera focuses.
The camera may be unable to focus
in the situations listed below (note that the focus point may
sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is unable to focus):
•The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame
•The subject lacks contrast
•The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting
brightness, or the subject is lit by spot lighting or by a neon sign or
other light source that changes in brightness
•Flicker or banding appears under fluorescent, mercury-vapor,
sodium-vapor, or similar lighting
•A cross (star) filter or other special filter is used
•The subject appears smaller than the focus point
•The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e.g., blinds
or a row of windows in a skyscraper)
•The subject is moving
In addition, the subject-tracking AF may be unable to track subjects if
they move quickly, leave the frame or are obscured by other objects,
change visibly in size, color, or brightness, or are too small, too large,
too bright, too dark, or similar in color or brightness to the
background.
174 Recording and Viewing Movies
Recording and Viewing Movies
Movies can be recorded in live view mode.
1Rotate the live view switch.
The view through the lens will be
displayed in the monitor.
2Focus.
Frame the opening shot and focus as
described in Steps 2 and 3 of “Framing
Photographs in the Monitor” (0162;
see also “Focusing in Live View” on pages 0164–167).
Note
that the number of subjects that can be detected in face-
priority AF drops during movie recording.
Recording Movies
DThe 0 Icon
A 0 icon (0169) indicates that
movies can not be recorded.
ABefore Recording
Set aperture before recording in mode
A or M (0118, 119).
175Recording and Viewing Movies
3Start recording.
Press the movie-record button to start
recording.
A recording indicator and
the time available are displayed in the
monitor.
Except in i and j modes,
exposure can be locked by pressing
the A (L) button (0127) or (in
modes h, P, S, A, and %) altered by
up to ±3 EV in steps of 1/3EV by
pressing the E (N) button and
rotating the command dial (0129;
note that depending on the
brightness of the subject, changes to
exposure may have no visible effect).
4End recording.
Press the movie-record button again to end recording.
Recording will end automatically when the maximum length
is reached, the memory card is full, another mode is selected,
or the monitor is closed (closing the monitor does not end
recording on televisions or other external displays).
ATaking Photographs During Movie Recording
To end movie recording, take a photograph, and exit to live view, press
the shutter-release button all the way down and hold it in this position
until the shutter is released.
The touch shutter (021) can not be used
to take photos during movie recording.
AMaximum Length
The maximum length for individual movie files is 4 GB (for maximum
recording times, see page 177); note that depending on memory card
write speed, shooting may end before this length is reached (0334).
Movie-record button
Time remaining
Recording indicator
176 Recording and Viewing Movies
DRecording Movies
Flicker, banding, or distortion may be visible in the monitor and in the
final movie under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or if the
camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at high speed
through frame (flicker and banding can be reduced using Flicker
reduction; 0281).
Bright light sources may leave after-images when
the camera is panned.
Jagged edges, color fringing, moiré, and bright
spots may also appear.
Bright regions or bands may appear in some
areas of the frame if the subject is briefly illuminated by a flash or other
bright, momentary light source.
When recording movies, avoid
pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources.
Failure to
observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal
circuitry.
The camera can record both video and sound; do not cover the
microphone (02) during recording.
Note that the built-in
microphone may record sounds made by the camera or lens during
autofocus and vibration reduction.
Flash lighting can not be used during movie recording.
Matrix metering is used regardless of the metering method selected.
Shutter speed and ISO sensitivity are adjusted automatically unless On
is selected for Manual movie settings (0179) and the camera is in
mode M.
177Recording and Viewing Movies
Movie Settings
Use the Movie settings option in the shooting menu (0236) to
adjust the following settings.
•Frame size/frame rate, Movie quality: Choose from the
following options.
The frame rate depends on the option
currently selected for Video mode in the setup menu
(0281):
Frame size/frame rate Maximum length
(high movie quality ★/
normal movie quality) 4
Frame size (pixels) Frame rate 1
L/t
1920 × 1080
60p 210 min./
20 min.
M/u50p 3
N/r30p 2
20 min./
29 min. 59 s
O/s25p 3
P/k24p
Q/l1280 × 720 60p 2
R/o50p 3
S/n640 × 424 30p 229 min. 59 s/
29 min. 59 s
T/p25p 3
1Listed value.
Actual frame rates for 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, and 24p are 59.94, 50, 29.97, 25,
and 23.976 fps respectively.
2 Available when NTSC is selected for Video mode (0281).
3 Available when PAL is selected for Video mode.
4 Movies recorded in miniature effect mode are up to three minutes long when played back.
178 Recording and Viewing Movies
•Microphone: Turn the built-in or optional stereo
microphones (0180, 333) on or off or adjust microphone
sensitivity.
Choose Auto sensitivity to adjust sensitivity
automatically, Microphone off to turn sound recording off; to
select microphone sensitivity manually, select Manual
sensitivity and choose a sensitivity.
•Wind noise reduction: Select On to enable the low-cut filter
for the built-in microphone (optional stereo microphones are
unaffected; 0180, 333), reducing noise produced by wind
blowing over the microphone (note that other sounds may
also be affected).
Wind-noise reduction for optional stereo
microphones can be enabled or disabled using microphone
controls.
AThe Live View Display
The movie crop can be viewed during live
view by pressing the R button to select the
“show movie indicators”, “hide indicators”,
“framing grid”, or “show basic photo
indicators” display (0170).
When movie
indicators are displayed, you can access the
following movie settings by pressing the P
button: movie frame size/quality,
microphone sensitivity, white balance
(0137), Picture Controls (0152), focus
mode (0164), AF-area mode (0166), wind
noise reduction, and exposure
compensation (0129).
If On is selected for
Movie settings > Manual movie settings
(0177) in mode M, ISO sensitivity (099)
can be adjusted in place of exposure compensation.
P button
Information display
179Recording and Viewing Movies
•Manual movie settings: Choose On to allow manual
adjustments to shutter speed and ISO sensitivity when the
camera is in mode M.
Shutter speed can be set to values as
fast as 1/4000 s; the slowest speed available varies with the
frame rate: 1/30 s for frame rates of 24p, 25p, and 30p, 1/50 s for
50p, and 1/60 s for 60p.
If shutter speed is not in this range
when live view starts, it will automatically be set to a
supported value, and remain at this value when live view
ends.
Note that ISO sensitivity is fixed at the value selected;
the camera does not adjust ISO sensitivity automatically
when On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO
sensitivity control in the shooting menu (0241).
1Select Movie settings.
Highlight Movie settings in the
shooting menu and press 2.
2Choose movie options.
Highlight the desired item and press
2, then highlight an option and press
J.
180 Recording and Viewing Movies
AUsing an External Microphone
The optional ME-1 stereo microphone can be used to reduce noise
caused by lens vibration being recorded during autofocus.
DThe Count-Down Display
A count down will be displayed 30 s before movie recording ends
automatically (0168).
Depending on shooting conditions, the timer
may appear immediately when movie recording begins.
Note that
regardless of the amount of recording time available, live view will still
end automatically when the timer expires.
Wait for the internal circuits
to cool before resuming movie recording.
AHDMI
When the camera is attached to an HDMI video device, the video
device will display the view through the lens.
If the device supports
HDMI-CEC, select Off for the HDMI > Device control option in the
setup menu (0223) before shooting in live view.
181Recording and Viewing Movies
Movies are indicated by a 1 icon in full-frame playback (0188).
Press J to start playback; your current position is indicated by
the movie progress bar.
The following operations can be performed:
Viewing Movies
1 icon Length
Current position/
total length Volume
1
Movie progress bar Guide
To Use Description
Pause Pause playback.
Play Resume playback when movie is paused or
during rewind/advance.
Advance/
rewind
Speed increases with each press, from 2× to
4× to 8× to 16×; keep pressed to skip to
beginning or end of movie (first frame is
indicated by h in top right corner of
monitor, last frame by i).
If playback is
paused, movie rewinds or advances one
frame at a time; hold for continuous rewind
or advance.
Skip 10 s Rotate the command dial one stop to skip
ahead or back 10 s.
182 Recording and Viewing Movies
Adjust
volume X/W (Q)Press X to increase volume, W (Q) to
decrease.
Return to
full-frame
playback
K / Press K or 1 to exit to full-frame playback.
To Use Description
183Recording and Viewing Movies
Trim footage to create edited copies of movies or save selected
frames as JPEG stills.
Trimming Movies
To create trimmed copies of movies:
1Display a movie full frame.
2Pause the movie on the new
opening or closing frame.
Play the movie back as described on
page 181, pressing J to start and
resume playback and 3 to pause.
Pause playback when you reach the
new opening or closing frame.
3Select Choose start/end point.
Press the P button, then highlight
Choose start/end point and press 2.
Editing Movies
Option Description
fChoose start/end point Create a copy from which the opening or
closing footage has been removed.
gSave selected frame Save a selected frame as a JPEG still.
Movie progress bar
P button
184 Recording and Viewing Movies
4Choose the current frame as the new
start or end point.
To create a copy that begins from the
current frame, highlight Start point
and press J. The frames before the
current frame will be removed when
you save the copy.
To create a copy that ends at the current frame, highlight End
point and press J. The frames after the current frame will be
removed when you save the copy.
5Confirm the new start or end point.
If the desired frame is not currently
displayed, press 4 or 2 to advance or
rewind (to skip to 10 s ahead or back,
rotate the command dial one stop).
6Create the copy.
Once the desired frame is displayed, press 1.
Start point
End point
185Recording and Viewing Movies
7Preview the movie.
To preview the copy, highlight
Preview and press J (to interrupt the
preview and return to the save
options menu, press 1).
To abandon
the current copy and return to Step 5,
highlight Cancel and press J; to save the copy, proceed to
Step 8.
8Save the copy.
Highlight Save as new file and press
J to save the copy to a new file.
To
replace the original movie file with
the edited copy, highlight Overwrite
existing file and press J.
DTrimming Movies
Movies must be at least two seconds long.
The copy will not be saved
if there is insufficient space available on the memory card.
Copies have the same time and date of creation as the original.
AChoosing the Role of the Current Frame
To make the frame displayed in Step 5 the new end point (x) instead of
the new start point (w) or vice versa, press the A (L) button.
A (L) button
186 Recording and Viewing Movies
Saving Selected Frames
To save a copy of a selected frame as a JPEG still:
1Pause the movie on the desired
frame.
Play the movie back as described on
page 181, pressing J to start and
resume playback and 3 to pause.
Pause the movie at the frame you
intend to copy.
2Choose Save selected frame.
Press the P button, then highlight
Save selected frame and press 2.
3Create a still copy.
Press 1 to create a still copy of the
current frame.
P button
187Recording and Viewing Movies
4Save the copy.
Highlight Ye s and press J to create a
fine-quality (090) JPEG copy of the
selected frame.
ASave Selected Frame
JPEG movie stills created with the Save selected frame option can not
be retouched.
JPEG movie stills lack some categories of photo
information (0192).
188 Playback and Deletion
Playback and Deletion
Full-Frame Playback
To play photographs back, press the K
button.
The most recent photograph will
be displayed in the monitor.
Viewing Pictures
To Use Description
View additional
photographs
Press 2 to view photographs in
order recorded, 4 to view
photographs in reverse order.
View additional
photo info
Press 1 or 3 to view information
about current photograph (0192).
Return to
shooting mode K /
Press the K button or press the
shutter-release button halfway to
exit to shooting mode.
Play movie
If current picture is marked with 1
icon to show that it is a movie,
pressing J starts movie playback
(0181).
189Playback and Deletion
AThe P Button
Pressing the P button in full-frame,
thumbnail, or calendar playback displays
playback options. Highlight options and
press 2 to rate pictures (0203), retouch
photos or edit movies (0183, 286), or select
pictures for transfer to a smart device
(0231).
P button
190 Playback and Deletion
Thumbnail Playback
To display images in “contact sheets” of 4, 12, or 80 images, press
the W (Q) button.
Full-frame
playback
Thumbnail playback Calendar
playback
To Use Description
Highlight images Use multi selector or command dial
to highlight pictures.
View highlighted
image
Press J to display the highlighted
image full frame.
Return to
shooting mode K /
Press the K button or press the
shutter-release button halfway to
exit to shooting mode.
W (Q)
X
W (Q)
X
191Playback and Deletion
Calendar Playback
To view images taken on a selected date, press the W (Q) button
when 80 images are displayed.
The operations that can be performed depend on whether the
cursor is in the date list or the thumbnail list:
Date list
Thumbnail list
Full-frame
playback
Thumbnail
playback
Calendar
playback
To Use Description
Toggle between
date list and
thumbnail list
W (Q)Press W (Q) or J button in date list
to place cursor in thumbnail list.
Press W (Q) again to return to date
list.
Exit to thumbnail
playback/Zoom
in on highlighted
photo
X
•Date list: Exit to 80-frame playback.
•Thumbnail list: Press and hold X
button to zoom in on highlighted
picture.
Highlight dates/
Highlight images
•Date list: Highlight date.
•Thumbnail list: Highlight picture.
Toggle full frame
playback
•Thumbnail list: View highlighted
picture.
Return to
shooting mode K /
Press the K button or press the
shutter-release button halfway to
exit to shooting mode.
W (Q)
X
W (Q)
X
192 Playback and Deletion
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full-
frame playback.
Press 1 or 3 to cycle through photo
information as shown below.
Note that “image only”, shooting
data, RGB histograms, highlights, and overview data are only
displayed if corresponding option is selected for Playback
display options (0234).
Location data are only displayed if an
optional GP-1/GP-1A was used when the photo was taken
(0283).
Photo Information
File information None (image only) Overview
Highlights Location data
RGB histogram Shooting data
193Playback and Deletion
❚❚ File Information
❚❚ Highlights*
* Flashing areas indicate highlights (areas that may be overexposed).
10
11
98
5
1 2 3 4
7
6
1Protect status..........................202
2Retouch indicator .................289
3Upload marking..................... 231
4Frame number/total number of
images
5File name.................................. 240
6Image quality ............................90
7Image size.................................. 92
8Time of recording...........32, 275
9Date of recording ...........32, 275
10 Folder name ............................238
11 Rating ........................................203
2
1
1Folder number—frame
number.................................. 238
2Image highlights
194 Playback and Deletion
❚❚ RGB Histogram
5
1
2
4
3
1Histogram (RGB channel).
In
all histograms, horizontal
axis gives pixel brightness,
vertical axis number of
pixels.
2Histogram (red channel)
3Histogram (green channel)
4Histogram (blue channel)
5White balance ........................ 137
White balance
fine-tuning....................... 140
Preset manual..................... 142
APlayback Zoom
To zoom in on the photograph when the
histogram is displayed, press X.
Use the X
and W (Q) buttons to zoom in and out and
scroll the image with the multi selector.
The
histogram will be updated to show only the
data for the portion of the image visible in
the monitor.
195Playback and Deletion
AHistograms
Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from
those displayed in imaging applications.
Some sample histograms are
shown below:
If the image contains objects
with a wide range of
brightnesses, the distribution of
tones will be relatively even.
If the image is dark, tone
distribution will be shifted to the
left.
If the image is bright, tone
distribution will be shifted to the
right.
Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to
the right, while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the
distribution to the left.
Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall
exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to see
photographs in the monitor.
196 Playback and Deletion
❚❚ Shooting Data
1 Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control on.
2 Displayed only in photos taken with accessories that support this function.
* Items displayed vary with Picture Control selected.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1Metering .................................. 125
Shutter speed......................... 114
Aperture................................... 114
2Shooting
mode................. 38, 54, 61, 113
ISO sensitivity 1.........................99
3Exposure compensation .... 129
4Focal length............................ 322
5Lens data
6Focus mode...................... 78, 164
Lens VR (vibration
reduction) 2................... 37, 245
7Flash type........................259, 323
Commander mode 2............. 259
8Flash mode..........................94, 96
9Flash control ........................... 259
Flash compensation............. 131
10 Camera name
11
12
13
11 White balance........................ 137
White balance
fine-tuning ...................... 140
Preset manual..................... 142
12 Color space..............................243
13 Picture Control *..................... 152
197Playback and Deletion
* The fourth page of the shooting data is only displayed if copyright information was recorded
with the photograph as described on page 274.
14
15
16
18
17
19
14 High ISO noise reduction ... 244
Long exposure noise
reduction.............................. 243
15 Active D-Lighting.................. 133
16 HDR (high dynamic
range)..................................... 135
17 Vignette control.....................244
18 Retouch history......................286
19 Image comment....................273
20
21
20 Name of photographer *..... 274 21 Copyright holder *.................274
198 Playback and Deletion
❚❚ Overview Data
1 Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on.
2 Displayed only in photos taken with accessories that support this function.
8
15
9
22
28
27
1314 12 11 10
1342
6
7
5
26 25 24 23
16 17 1819 20 21
1Frame number/total number
of images
2Upload marking .................... 231
3Protect status ......................... 202
4Camera name
5Retouch indicator................. 289
6Image comment
indicator ............................... 273
7Location data indicator ...... 283
8Histogram showing the
distribution of tones in the
image (0 195).
9Image quality ............................90
10 Image size...................................92
11 File name ................................. 240
12 Time of recording .......... 32, 275
13 Date of recording........... 32, 275
14 Folder name............................ 238
15 Rating........................................ 203
16 Metering................................... 125
17 Shooting
mode................. 38, 54, 61, 113
18 Shutter speed.........................114
19 Aperture................................... 114
20 ISO sensitivity 1..........................99
21 Focal length ............................ 322
22 Active D-Lighting.................. 133
23 Picture Control.......................152
24 Color space..............................243
25 Flash mode..........................94, 96
26 White balance ........................ 137
White balance
fine-tuning........................... 140
Preset manual ........................ 142
27 Flash compensation............. 131
Commander mode 2............. 259
28 Exposure compensation..... 129
199Playback and Deletion
❚❚ Location Data
Location data are displayed only if an optional GP-1 or GP-1A
GPS unit (0333) was used when the photo was taken (0283).
In the case of movies, the data give the location at the start of
recording.
2
1
3
4
1Latitude
2Longitude
3Altitude
4Coordinated Universal Time
(UTC)
200 Playback and Deletion
Press the X button to zoom in on the image displayed in full-
frame playback.
The following operations can be performed
while zoom is in effect:
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom
To Use Description
Zoom in or out X /
W (Q)
Press X to zoom in to maximum of
approximately 33× (large images),
25× (medium images) or 13× (small
images).
Press W (Q) to zoom out.
While photo is zoomed in, use multi
selector to view areas of image not
visible in monitor.
Keep multi
selector pressed to scroll rapidly to
other areas of frame.
Navigation
window is displayed when zoom
ratio is altered; area currently visible
in monitor is indicated by yellow
border.
Bar under navigation
window shows zoom ratio; turns
green at ratio of 1 : 1.
View other areas
of image
201Playback and Deletion
Select/zoom in
on or out from
faces
P
Faces detected during zoom are
indicated by white borders in
navigation window.
Press P and use
the multi selector to view other
faces, or press J to zoom in on the
currently selected face.
Press P
again to return to normal zoom.
View other
images
Rotate command dial to view same
location in other images at current
zoom ratio.
Playback zoom is
cancelled when a movie is displayed.
Cancel zoom Cancel zoom and return to full-frame
playback.
Return to
shooting mode K /
Press the K button or press the
shutter-release button halfway to
exit to shooting mode.
To Use Description
202 Playback and Deletion
In full-frame, zoom, thumbnail, and calendar playback, press the
A (L) button to protect the current picture from accidental
deletion.
Protected files are marked with a P icon and can not
be deleted using the O button or the Delete option in the
playback menu.
Note that protected images will be deleted
when the memory card is formatted (0272). To remove
protection from a picture so that it can be deleted, display or
highlight it and press the A (L) button.
Protecting Photographs from Deletion
A (L) button
ARemoving Protection from All Images
To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently
selected in the Playback folder menu (0234), press the A (L) and
O buttons together for about two seconds during playback.
203Playback and Deletion
Rate pictures or mark them as candidates for later deletion.
Rating is not available with protected images.
Rating Individual Pictures
1Select an image.
Display the image in full-frame playback or playback zoom or
highlight it in the thumbnail list in thumbnail or calendar
playback.
2Display playback options.
Press the P button to display playback
options.
3Select Rating.
Highlight Rating and press 2.
4Choose a rating.
Press 1 or 3 to choose a rating of
from zero to five stars, or select ) to
mark the picture as a candidate for
later deletion.
Press J to complete
the operation.
Rating Pictures
P button
204 Playback and Deletion
Rating Multiple Pictures
Use the Rating option in the playback menu to rate multiple
pictures.
1Select Rating.
Highlight Rating in the playback
menu and press 2.
2Rate pictures.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight pictures (to
view the currently highlighted picture
full frame, press and hold the X
button) and press 1 or 3 to choose a
rating of from zero to five stars, or
select ) to mark the picture as a candidate for later deletion.
Press J to complete the operation.
205Playback and Deletion
To delete the photograph displayed in full-frame playback or
highlighted in the thumbnail list, press the O button.
To delete
multiple selected photographs, all photographs taken on a
selected date, or all photographs in the current playback folder,
use the Delete option in the playback menu.
Once deleted,
photographs can not be recovered.
Note that pictures that are
protected can not be deleted.
Full-Frame, Thumbnail, and Calendar Playback
Press the O button to delete the current photograph.
1Press the O button.
A confirmation dialog will be
displayed.
2Press the O button again.
To delete the photograph, press the O
button again.
To exit without deleting
the photograph, press the K button.
Deleting Photographs
ACalendar Playback
During calendar playback, you can delete all photographs taken on a
selected date by highlighting the date in the date list and pressing the
O button (0191).
O button
206 Playback and Deletion
The Playback Menu
The Delete option in the playback menu contains the following
options.
Note that depending on the number of images, some
time may be required for deletion.
❚❚ Selected: Deleting Selected Photographs
1Select pictures.
Use the multi selector to highlight a
picture and press the W (Q) button to
select or deselect (to view the
highlighted picture full screen, press
and hold the X button).
Selected
pictures are marked by a O icon.
Repeat as desired to select additional
pictures.
2Press J to complete the operation.
A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; highlight Yes and press J.
Option Description
QSelected Delete selected pictures.
nSelect date Delete all pictures taken on a selected date
(0207).
RAll Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected
for playback (0234).
207Playback and Deletion
❚❚ Select Date: Deleting Photographs Taken on a Selected Date
1Select dates.
Highlight a date and press 2 to select
all pictures taken on the highlighted
date.
Selected dates are indicated by
check marks.
Repeat as desired to
select additional dates; to deselect a
date, highlight it and press 2.
2Press J to complete the operation.
A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; highlight Yes and press J.
208 Playback and Deletion
The Slide show option in the playback menu is used to display a
slide show of the pictures in the current playback folder (0234).
1Select Slide show.
Highlight Slide show in the playback
menu and press 2.
2Start the slide show.
Highlight Start in the slide show
menu and press J.
The following operations can be performed while the slide
show is in progress:
Slide Shows
To Use Description
Skip back/
skip ahead
Press 4 to return to previous frame, 2 to
skip to next frame.
View
additional
photo info
Change photo info displayed (0192).
Pause Pause slide show.
Select Restart to
resume.
Raise/lower
volume
X /
W (Q)
Press X during movie playback to increase
volume, W (Q) to decrease.
Exit to
playback
mode
KEnd show and return to playback mode.
209Playback and Deletion
The dialog shown at right is displayed
when the show ends.
Select Restart to
restart or Exit to return to the playback
menu.
Slide Show Options
Before starting a slide show, you can use the options in the slide
show menu to select the images displayed by type or rating and
choose how long each image is displayed.
•Image type: Choose from Still images
and movies, Still images only,
Movies only, and By rating.
To
include only pictures with selected
ratings, highlight By rating and press
2.
A list of ratings will be displayed;
highlight ratings and press 2 to select
or deselect pictures with the
highlighted rating for inclusion in the
slide show.
Selected ratings are
indicated by a check mark.
Press J to
exit when the desired ratings are selected.
•Frame interval: Choose how long still
images are displayed.
210 Connections
Connections
To upload, view, edit, and share photos and movies, download
the ViewNX 2 installer from the following website and follow the
on-screen instructions to complete installation.
An Internet
connection is required.
For system requirements and other
information, see the Nikon website for your region (0xix).
http://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
Nikon also offers Capture NX-D image fine-tuning software,
available for download from:
http://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
Installing ViewNX 2
ACapture NX-D
Use Nikon’s Capture NX-D software to fine-tune photos or to change
settings for NEF (RAW) pictures and save them in other formats.
Capture NX-D also offers an Image Dust Off feature that processes NEF
(RAW) images to remove image artifacts caused by dust inside the
camera.
DUse the Latest Versions
Be sure to use the latest version. Using a version that does not support
your camera may result in difficulties copying NEF (RAW) images to
your computer.
211Connections
Copy Pictures to the Computer
Before proceeding, be sure you have installed ViewNX 2 (0210).
1Connect the USB cable.
After turning the camera off and ensuring that a memory
card is inserted, connect the supplied USB cable as shown
and then turn the camera on.
Using ViewNX 2
AUse a Reliable Power Source
To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure the camera
battery is fully charged.
AConnecting Cables
Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting
interface cables.
Do not use force or attempt to insert the
connectors at an angle.
DDuring Transfer
Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while
transfer is in progress.
DUSB Hubs
Transfer may not proceed as expected if the camera is connected
via a USB hub or keyboard.
212 Connections
2Start Nikon Transfer 2 component of ViewNX 2.
If a message is displayed prompting you to choose a
program, select Nikon Transfer 2.
AWindows 7
If the following dialog is displayed, select Nikon Transfer 2 as
described below.
1Under Import pictures and videos,
click Change program.
A program
selection dialog will be displayed;
select Import File using Nikon
Transfer 2 and click OK.
2Double-click Import File.
AWindows 8.1
Windows 8.1 may display an AutoPlay
prompt when the camera is connected.
Tap or click the dialog and then tap or
click Import File/Nikon Transfer 2 to
select Nikon Transfer 2.
213Connections
3Click Start Transfer.
At default settings, pictures on the memory card will be
copied to the computer.
4Terminate the connection.
When transfer is complete, turn the camera off and
disconnect the USB cable.
Start Transfer
AFor More Information
Consult online help for more information on using ViewNX 2.
214 Connections
Selected JPEG images can be printed on a PictBridge printer
(0374) connected directly to the camera.
Connecting the Printer
Connect the camera using the supplied USB cable.
Do not use
force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.
When the camera and printer are turned on, a welcome screen
will be displayed in the monitor, followed by a PictBridge
playback display.
Printing Photographs
DSelecting Photographs for Printing
NEF (RAW) photographs (090) can not be selected for printing.
JPEG
copies of NEF (RAW) images can be created using the NEF (RAW)
processing option in the retouch menu (0289).
DDate Imprint
If you select On for Print date in the PictBridge menu when printing
photographs containing date information recorded using Custom
Setting d4 (Date stamp; 0256), the date will appear twice.
The
imprinted date may however be cropped out if the photographs are
cropped or printed without a border.
215Connections
Printing Pictures One at a Time
1Display the desired picture.
Press 4 or 2 to view additional pictures.
Press the X button
to zoom in on the current frame (press K to exit zoom).
To
view eight pictures at a time, press the W(Q) button.
Use the
multi selector to highlight pictures, or press X to display the
highlighted picture full frame.
2Adjust printing options.
Press J to display the following items, then press 1 or 3 to
highlight an item and press 2 to view options (only options
supported by the current printer are listed; to use the default
option, select Printer default).
After selecting an option,
press J to return to the printer settings menu.
Option Description
Page size Choose a page size.
No.
of copies
This option is listed only when pictures are printed
one at a time.
Press 1 or 3 to choose number of
copies (maximum 99).
Border Choose whether to frame photos in white borders.
Print date Choose whether to print the times and dates of
recordings on photos.
Cropping
This option is listed only when pictures are printed
one at a time.
To exit without cropping, highlight No
cropping and press J.
To crop the current picture,
highlight Crop and press 2.
A crop selection dialog
will be displayed; press X to increase the size of the
crop, W (Q) to decrease, and use the multi selector to
position the crop.
Note that print quality may drop if
small crops are printed at large sizes.
216 Connections
3Start printing.
Select Start printing and press J to start printing.
To cancel
before all copies have been printed, press J.
Printing Multiple Pictures
1Display the PictBridge menu.
Press the G button in the PictBridge playback display.
2Choose an option.
Highlight one of the following options and press 2.
•Print select: Select pictures for printing.
Press 4 or 2 to scroll
through pictures (to view the highlighted picture full
screen, press and hold theX button) and press 1 or 3 to
choose the number of prints.
To deselect a picture, set the
number of prints to zero.
•Select date: Print one copy of all the pictures taken on a
selected date.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a date and press 2
to select or deselect.
To view the pictures taken on the
selected date, press W (Q).
Use the multi selector to scroll
through the pictures, or press and hold X to view the
current picture full screen.
Press W (Q) again to return to
the date selection dialog.
•Print (DPOF): Print the current DPOF print order (0218).
The
order can be viewed and modified before printing as
described in the description for Print select, above.
•Index print: To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the
memory card, proceed to Step 3.
Note that if the memory
card contains more than 256 pictures, only the first 256
images will be printed.
A warning will be displayed if the
page size selected in Step 3 is too small for an index print.
217Connections
3Adjust printer settings.
Adjust printer settings as described in Step 2 on page 215.
4Start printing.
Select Start printing and press J to start printing.
To cancel
before all copies have been printed, press J.
218 Connections
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set
The DPOF print order option in the playback menu is used to
create digital “print orders” for PictBridge-compatible printers
and devices that support DPOF (0374).
1Choose DPOF print order >
Select/set.
Select DPOF print order in the
playback menu, then highlight
Select/set and press 2 (to remove all
photographs from the print order,
select Deselect all).
2Select pictures.
Press 4 or 2 to scroll through the
pictures on the memory card (to view
the highlighted picture full screen,
press and hold the X button) and
press 1 or 3 to choose the number of
prints (maximum 99).
To deselect a picture, set the number of
prints to zero.
Press J when all the desired pictures have
been selected.
219Connections
3Select imprint options.
Highlight the following options and
press 2 to toggle the highlighted
option on or off.
•Print shooting data: Print shutter speed
and aperture on all pictures in print
order.
•Print date: Print date of recording on all pictures in print
order.
4Complete the print order.
Press J to complete the print order.
DDPOF Print Order
To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a
PictBridge printer, select Print (DPOF) in the PictBridge menu and
follow the steps in “Printing Multiple Pictures” to modify and print the
current order (0216).
DPOF print date and shooting data options are
not supported when printing via direct USB connection; to print the
date of recording on photographs in the current print order, use the
PictBridge Print date option.
The DPOF print order option can not be used if there is not enough
space on the memory card to store the print order.
NEF (RAW) photographs (090) can not be selected using this option.
JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) images can be created using the NEF (RAW)
processing option in the retouch menu (0289).
Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a
computer or other device after the print order is created.
220 Connections
The supplied audio video (A/V) cable can be used to connect the
camera to a television or video recorder for playback or
recording.
The optional High-Definition Multimedia Interface
(HDMI) cable (0333) or a type C HDMI cable (available
separately from third-party suppliers) can be used to connect
the camera to high-definition video devices.
Standard Definition Devices
Before connecting the A/V cable to a standard television as
shown, confirm that the camera video standard (0281)
matches that used in the TV.
Always turn the camera off before
connecting or disconnecting the A/V cable.
Tune the television to the video channel, then turn the camera
on and press the K button.
During playback, images will be
displayed on the television screen.
Note that the edges of
images may not be displayed.
Viewing Pictures on TV
Connect to video device
Connect to
camera
Audio (white)
Video (yellow)
Audio (red)
221Connections
AVideo Mode
If no image is displayed, check that camera is correctly connected and
that the option selected for Video mode (0281) matches the video
standard used in the TV.
ATelevision Playback
Use of an AC adapter (available separately) is recommended for
extended playback.
222 Connections
High-Definition Devices
The camera can be connected to HDMI devices using an HDMI
cable as shown.
Always turn the camera off before connecting
or disconnecting an HDMI cable.
Tune the device to the HDMI channel, then turn the camera on
and press the K button.
During playback, images will be
displayed on the high-definition television or monitor screen.
Note that the edges of images may not be displayed.
APlayback Volume
Volume can be adjusted using television controls; the camera controls
can not be used.
Connect to high-definition device
(choose cable with connector for
HDMI device)
Connect to
camera
223Connections
❚❚ Choosing an Output Resolution
To choose the format for images output
to the HDMI device, select HDMI >
Output resolution in the camera setup
menu (0270).
If Auto is selected, the
camera will automatically select the
appropriate format.
❚❚ Controlling the Camera with the TV Remote
If On is selected for HDMI >Device control in the setup menu
(0270) when the camera is connected to a television that
supports HDMI-CEC and both the camera and television are on,
the television remote can be used in place of the camera multi
selector and J button during full-frame playback and slide
shows.
If Off is selected, the television remote can not be used
to control the camera, but the camera can be used to shoot
photographs and movies in live view.
AHDMI-CEC Devices
HDMI-CEC (High-Definition Multimedia Interface–Consumer
Electronics Control) is a standard that allows HDMI devices to be used
to control peripherals to which they are connected.
When the camera
is connected to an HDMI-CEC device, ) will appear in the viewfinder
in place of the number of exposures remaining.
A1920 × 1080 60p/50p
Selecting 1920 × 1080; 60p or 1920 × 1080; 50p for Movie settings
> Frame size/frame rate may cause variations in the resolution and
frame rate of the data output to HDMI devices during recording.
During playback (0181), HDMI devices will display the movie only;
indicators will not be displayed.
DHDMI > Output Resolution
Movies can not be output at resolutions of 1920 × 1080; 60p or 1920
× 1080; 50p.
Some devices may not support an Output resolution
setting of Auto; in this case, select 1080i (interlaced).
224 Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi
The camera can connect via Wi-Fi wireless networks to a smart
device running Nikon’s dedicated Wireless Mobile Utility app
(0225).
What Wi-Fi Can Do for You
Download pictures Share pictures
Remote control
AInstalling the App
1Find the app.
On the smart device, connect to the Google Play service, the App
Store, or another app marketplace and search for “Wireless Mobile
Utility”.
For more information, see the instructions provided with
the smart device.
2Install the app.
Read the app description and install the app.
A pdf manual for the
Wireless Mobile Utility is available for download at the following
URLs:
•Android: http://nikonimglib.com/ManDL/WMAU/
•iOS: http://nikonimglib.com/ManDL/WMAU-ios/
Android iOS
225Wi-Fi
Before connecting via Wi-Fi (wireless LAN), install the Wireless
Mobile Utility on your Android or iOS smart device.
Instructions
for accessing the camera vary with the type of connection used
by the smart device.
Android
•Push-button WPS: If the smart device supports push-button WPS
(i.e., has a WPS button connection option in its Wi-Fi
settings menu), you can use this easy method to connect to
the smart device (0226)
•PIN-entry WPS: If the smart device supports WPS, you can use
the camera to establish a connection by entering the PIN
displayed by the smart device (0228)
• View SSID: If the smart device does not support WPS, you can
connect by selecting the camera SSID on the smart device
(0229)
iOS
•View SSID: Connect by selecting the camera SSID on the smart
device (0229)
Accessing the Camera
DSecurity
If you do not use WPS when connecting for the first time, the
connection will not be protected by a password or other form of
security.
Security settings can be configured in the Wireless Mobile
Utility once a connection is established.
More information can be
found in the Wireless Mobile Utility manual, which is available for
download in pdf format from the following URLs:
•Android: http://nikonimglib.com/ManDL/WMAU/
•iOS: http://nikonimglib.com/ManDL/WMAU-ios/
226 Wi-Fi
WPS (Android Only)
1Enable the camera’s built-in Wi-Fi.
Highlight Wi-Fi in the setup menu and
press 2.
Highlight Network
connection and press 2, then
highlight Enable and press J.
Wait a
few seconds for Wi-Fi to activate.
2Connect.
Enable WPS button connections on the camera and smart
device:
•Camera: Highlight Network settings
and press 2.
Highlight Push-button WPS and
press 2 to ready the camera for a
WPS connection.
The camera will
wait about two minutes for a WPS
connection request from the smart
device.
To extend the wait time,
press J.
•Smart device: Select Wi-Fi settings > WPS button
connection.
227Wi-Fi
3Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility.
Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility on the smart device.
The
main dialog will be displayed.
228 Wi-Fi
PIN Entry (Android Only)
1Enable the camera’s built-in Wi-Fi.
Highlight Wi-Fi in the setup menu and
press 2.
Highlight Network
connection and press 2, then
highlight Enable and press J.
Wait a
few seconds for Wi-Fi to activate.
2Select Network settings > PIN-entry WPS.
Highlight Network settings and
press 2.
Highlight PIN-entry WPS and press
2.
3Enter the PIN.
Enter the PIN displayed by the smart device.
Press 4 or 2 to
highlight digits and press 1 or 3 to change.
Press J when
entry is complete.
4Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility.
Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility on the smart device.
The
main dialog will be displayed.
229Wi-Fi
SSID (Android and iOS)
1Enable the camera’s built-in Wi-Fi.
Highlight Wi-Fi in the setup menu and
press 2.
Highlight Network
connection and press 2, then
highlight Enable and press J.
Wait a
few seconds for Wi-Fi to activate.
2Display the camera SSID.
Highlight Network settings and
press 2.
Highlight View SSID and press 2.
3Select the camera SSID.
Select the camera SSID in the list of networks displayed by
the smart device.
4Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility.
Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility on the smart device.
The
main dialog will be displayed.
230 Wi-Fi
❚❚ Terminating the Connection
Wi-Fi can be disabled by:
•Selecting Wi-Fi > Network connection > Disable in the
camera setup menu
•Starting movie recording
•Turning the camera off
❚❚ Restoring Default Settings
To restore default network settings, select Wi-Fi > Network
settings > Reset network settings.
A confirmation dialog will
be displayed; highlight Yes and press J to restore default
network settings.
AThe Wi-Fi Display
While Wi-Fi is enabled, a c icon will flash in
the information display.
The icon will stop
flashing once a connection has been
established and the camera is exchanging
data with the smart device.
DWi-Fi
Read the warnings on pages xx to xxii before using the Wi-Fi function.
To disable Wi-Fi in settings in which its use is prohibited, select Wi-Fi >
Network connection > Disable in the camera setup menu.
Note that
Eye-Fi cards can not be used while Wi-Fi is enabled and that the
standby timer will not turn off while the Wireless Mobile Utility app on
the smart device is communicating with the camera. If no data are
exchanged for about 5 minutes, the standby timer will turn off.
The
camera Wi-Fi function is only available when a memory card is inserted
and can not be used when a USB or HDMI cable is connected.
To
prevent loss of power while connected, charge the battery before
enabling the network connection.
231Wi-Fi
Follow the steps below to select photos for upload to the smart
device.
Movies can not be selected for upload.
Selecting Individual Pictures for Upload
1Select an image.
Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list in
thumbnail or calendar playback.
2Display playback options.
Press the P button to display playback
options.
3Choose Select to send to smart
device/deselect.
Highlight Select to send to smart
device/deselect and press J.
Pictures selected for upload are
indicated by a & icon; to deselect,
display or highlight the image and
repeat Steps 2 and 3.
Selecting Pictures for Upload
P button
232 Wi-Fi
Selecting Multiple Pictures for Upload
To change the upload status of multiple pictures, use the Select
to send to smart device option in the playback menu.
1Choose Select to send to smart
device.
Highlight Select to send to smart
device in the playback menu and
press 2.
2Select pictures.
Use the multi selector to highlight
pictures and press W (Q) to select or
deselect (to view the highlighted
picture full screen, press and hold the
X button).
Selected pictures are
marked by a & icon.
3Press J.
Press J to complete the operation.
233DThe Playback Menu: Managing Images
Camera Menus
To display the playback menu, press G and select the D
(playback menu) tab.
Playback Menu Options
The playback menu contains the following options:
DThe Playback Menu: Managing Images
G button
Option Default 0
Delete — 206
Playback folder All 234
Playback display options — 234
Image review On 234
Auto image rotation On 235
Rotate tall On 235
Slide show
Image type Still images and movies 208
Frame interval 2 s
DPOF print order — 218
Rating — 204
Select to send to smart device — 232
234 DThe Playback Menu: Managing Images
Choose a folder for playback:
Choose the information available in the
playback photo information display
(0192).
Press 1 or 3 to highlight and
press 2 to select or deselect.
Selected
items are indicated by check marks.
To
return to the playback menu, press J.
Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed in the
monitor immediately after shooting.
Playback Folder
G button ➜Dplayback menu
Option Description
D5500 Pictures in all folders created with the D5500 will be visible
during playback.
All Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback.
Current
Only photos in the folder currently selected for Storage
folder in the shooting menu (0238) are displayed during
playback.
Playback Display Options
G button ➜Dplayback menu
Image Review
G button ➜Dplayback menu
235DThe Playback Menu: Managing Images
Photographs taken while On is selected contain information on
camera orientation, allowing them to be rotated automatically
during playback or when viewed in ViewNX 2 or Capture NX-D
(0210).
The following orientations are recorded:
Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected.
Choose this option when panning or taking photographs with
the lens pointing up or down.
If On is selected, “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures will be
automatically rotated for display in the monitor (pictures taken
with Off selected for Auto image rotation will still be displayed
in landscape orientation).
Note that because the camera itself is
already in the appropriate orientation during shooting, images
are not rotated automatically during image review.
Auto Image Rotation
G button ➜Dplayback menu
Landscape (wide)
orientation
Camera rotated 90°
clockwise
Camera rotated 90°
counterclockwise
ARotate Tall
To automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) photographs for
display during playback, select On for the Rotate tall option.
Rotate Tall
G button ➜Dplayback menu
236 CThe Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
To display the shooting menu, press G and select the
C(shooting menu) tab.
Shooting Menu Options
The shooting menu contains the following options:
CThe Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
G button
Option Default 0
Reset shooting menu —237
Storage folder —238
File naming DSC 240
Image quality JPEG normal 90
Image size Large 92
NEF (RAW) recording 14-bit 240
ISO sensitivity settings
ISO sensitivity P, S, A, M100 99
Other modes Auto
Auto ISO sensitivity control Off 241
White balance Auto 137
Fluorescent Cool-white fluorescent 138
Set Picture Control Standard 152
Manage Picture Control —158
Color space sRGB 243
Active D-Lighting Auto 133
HDR (high dynamic range) Off 135
237CThe Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
1 Available only with lenses that support this item.
2 Default varies with country of purchase.
Note: Depending on camera settings, some items may be grayed out and
unavailable.
Select Yes to reset shooting menu settings.
Release mode
m, wContinuous H 71
Other modes Single frame
Long exposure NR Off 243
High ISO NR Normal 244
Vignette control Normal 244
Auto distortion control Off 245
Interval timer shooting
Start options Now 102
Interval 1 min. 102
Number of times 1103
Exposure smoothing Off 103
Optical VR 1On 245
Movie settings
Frame size/frame rate 2—
177
Movie quality Normal
Microphone Auto sensitivity
Wind noise reduction Off
Manual movie settings Off
Reset Shooting Menu
G button ➜Cshooting menu
Option Default 0
238 CThe Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Select the folder in which subsequent images will be stored.
❚❚ Selecting Folders by Folder Number
1Choose Select folder by number.
Highlight Select folder by number and press 2.
2Choose a folder number.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight a digit, press 1 or 3 to change.
If a
folder with the selected number already exists, a W, X, or Y
icon will be displayed to the left of the folder number:
•W : Folder is empty.
•X : Folder is partially full.
•Y : Folder contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered
9999.
No further pictures can be stored in this folder.
3Save changes and exit.
Press J to complete the operation and return to the main
menu (to exit without choosing the storage folder, press the
G button).
If a folder with the specified number does not
already exist, a new folder will be created. Subsequent
photographs will be stored in the selected folder unless it is
already full.
Storage Folder
G button ➜Cshooting menu
239CThe Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
❚❚ Selecting Folders from a List
1Choose Select folder from list.
Highlight Select folder from list and
press 2.
2Highlight a folder.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a folder.
3Select the highlighted folder.
Press J to select the highlighted folder and return to the
main menu.
Subsequent photographs will be stored in the
selected folder.
DFolder and File Numbers
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains 999 pictures or a
picture numbered 9999, the shutter-release will be disabled and no
further photographs can be taken.
To continue shooting, create a
folder with a number less than 999, or select an existing folder with a
number less than 999 and less than 999 images.
AStartup Time
Additional time may be required for camera startup if the memory card
contains a very large number of files or folders.
240 CThe Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Photographs are saved using file names consisting of “DSC_” or,
in the case of images that use the Adobe RGB color space
(0243), “_DSC”, followed by a four-digit number and a three-
letter extension (e.g., “DSC_0001.JPG”).
The File naming option
is used to select three letters to replace the “DSC” portion of the
file name.
For information on editing file names, see page 159.
Choose the bit depth for NEF (RAW) images.
File Naming
G button ➜Cshooting menu
AExtensions
The following extensions are used: “.NEF” for NEF (RAW) images, “.JPG”
for JPEG images, “.MOV” for movies, and “.NDF” for dust off reference
data. In each pair of photographs recorded at image-quality settings of
NEF (RAW)+JPEG, the NEF and JPEG images have the same file names
but different extensions.
NEF (RAW) Recording
G button ➜Cshooting menu
Option Description
(12-bit NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of 12
bits.
)14-bit
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of 14
bits, producing larger files but increasing the
amount of color data recorded.
241CThe Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Adjust ISO sensitivity (099).
❚❚ Auto ISO Sensitivity control
If Off is chosen for Auto ISO sensitivity control in P, S, A, and M
modes, ISO sensitivity will remain fixed at the value selected by
the user (099).
When On is chosen, ISO sensitivity will
automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be
achieved at the value selected by the user.
The maximum value
for auto ISO sensitivity can be selected using the Maximum
sensitivity option in the Auto ISO sensitivity control menu
(choose lower values to prevent noise (randomly-spaced bright
pixels, fog, or lines), but note that if the ISO sensitivity selected
by the user is higher than that chosen for Maximum sensitivity,
the value selected by the user will be used instead; the minimum
value for auto ISO sensitivity is automatically set to ISO 100).
In
modes P and A, sensitivity will only be adjusted if underexposure
would result at the shutter speed selected for Minimum shutter
speed (1/2000–30 s, or Auto; in modes S and M, sensitivity will be
adjusted for optimal exposure at the shutter speed selected by
the user).
If Auto (available only with CPU lenses) is selected, the
camera will choose the minimum shutter speed based on the
focal length of the lens (auto shutter-speed selection can be
fine-tuned by highlighting Auto and pressing 2).
Slower
shutter speeds will be used only if optimal exposure can not be
achieved at the ISO sensitivity value selected for Maximum
sensitivity.
ISO Sensitivity Settings
G button ➜Cshooting menu
242 CThe Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
When On is selected, the viewfinder
shows ISO AUTO and the information
display ISO-A.
These indicators flash when
sensitivity is altered from the value
selected by the user.
AMaximum Sensitivity/Minimum Shutter Speed
When auto ISO sensitivity control is
enabled, the ISO sensitivity and shutter
speed graphics in the information
display show the maximum sensitivity
and minimum shutter speed.
AAuto ISO Sensitivity Control
Noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) is more likely at
higher sensitivities.
Use the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu
to reduce noise (0244).
Note that ISO sensitivity may be raised
automatically when auto ISO sensitivity control is used in combination
with slow sync flash modes (available with the built-in flash and the
optional flash units listed on page 323), possibly preventing the
camera from selecting slow shutter speeds.
Auto ISO sensitivity
control is available only in i-TTL flash control mode (0259, 325); in
other modes, the value selected for ISO sensitivity will be used for
pictures taken with the built-in flash or optional flash units.
Minimum shutter speed
Maximum sensitivity
243CThe Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
The color space determines the gamut of colors available for
color reproduction.
sRGB is recommended for general-purpose
printing and display; Adobe RGB, with its broader gamut of
colors, for professional publication and commercial printing.
Regardless of the option selected, movies are recorded in sRGB.
If On is selected, photographs taken at
shutter speeds slower than 1 s will be
processed to reduce noise (bright spots
or fog).
The time required for processing roughly doubles;
during processing, “lm” will flash in the viewfinder and
pictures can not be taken (noise reduction will not be performed
if the camera is turned off before processing is complete).
Color Space
G button ➜Cshooting menu
AAdobe RGB
For accurate color reproduction, Adobe RGB images require
applications, displays, and printers that support color management.
AColor Space
ViewNX 2 and Capture NX-D (0210) automatically select the correct
color space when opening photographs created with this camera.
Results can not be guaranteed with third-party software.
Long Exposure NR
G button ➜Cshooting menu
244 CThe Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to
reduce “noise.”
“Vignetting” is a drop in brightness at the edges of a
photograph.
Vignette control reduces vignetting for type G, E,
and D lenses (PC lenses excluded).
Its effects vary from lens to
lens and are most noticeable at maximum aperture.
Choose
from High, Normal, Low, and Off.
High ISO NR
G button ➜Cshooting menu
Option Description
High Reduce noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels), particularly
in photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities.
Choose the
amount of noise reduction performed from High, Normal,
and Low.
Normal
Low
Off Noise reduction is performed only as required and never at
an amount higher than when Low is selected.
Vignette Control
G button ➜Cshooting menu
AVignette Control
Depending on the scene, shooting conditions, and type of lens, JPEG
images may exhibit noise (fog) or variations in peripheral brightness,
while custom Picture Controls and preset Picture Controls that have
been modified from default settings may not produce the desired
effect.
Take test shots and view the results in the monitor.
Vignette
control does not apply to movies (0174) or to pictures taken with
lenses that support FX format.
245CThe Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Select On to reduce barrel distortion in photos taken with wide-
angle lenses and to reduce pin-cushion distortion in photos
taken with long lenses (note that the edges of the area visible in
the viewfinder may be cropped out of the final photograph, and
that the time needed to process photographs before recording
begins may increase). This option does not apply to movies and
is available only with type G, E, and D lenses (PC, fisheye, and
certain other lenses excluded); results are not guaranteed with
other lenses.
This item is displayed only with lenses that support it. Selecting
On enables vibration reduction, which takes effect whenever
the shutter-release button is pressed halfway (0379). Select Off
to disable vibration reduction.
Auto Distortion Control
G button ➜Cshooting menu
Optical VR
G button ➜Cshooting menu
AThe Vibration Reduction Indicator
A vibration reduction indicator appears in
the information display when On is selected
for Optical VR.
246 ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
To display the Custom Settings menu, press G and select the
A (Custom Settings menu) tab.
Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings to suit
individual preferences.
ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
G button
Custom Setting groups
Main menu
Reset custom
settings (0248)
247ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Custom Settings
The following Custom Settings are available:
Custom Setting Default 0
Reset custom settings 248
aAutofocus
a1 AF-C priority selection Focus 248
a2 Number of focus points 39 points 249
a3 Built-in AF-assist illuminator On 250
a4 Rangefinder Off 250
a5 Manual focus ring in AF mode *Enable 251
bExposure
b1 EV steps for exposure cntrl 1/3 step 252
b2 ISO display Off 252
cTimers/AE lock
c1 Shutter-release button AE-L Off 252
c2 Auto off timers Normal 253
c3 Self-timer Self-timer delay: 10 s;
number of shots: 1 254
c4 Remote on duration (ML-L3) 1 min 254
dShooting/display
d1 Exposure delay mode Off 254
d2 File number sequence Off 255
d3 Viewfinder grid display Off 256
d4 Date stamp Off 256
d5 Reverse indicators 258
eBracketing/flash
e1 Flash cntrl for built-in flash/
Optional flash TTL 259
e2 Auto bracketing set AE bracketing 264
248 ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Note: Depending on camera settings, some items may be grayed out and
unavailable.
Select Yes to restore Custom Settings to their default values.
When AF-C is selected for viewfinder photography (078), this
option controls whether photographs can be taken whenever
the shutter-release button is pressed (release priority) or only
when the camera is in focus (focus priority).
fControls
f1 Assign Fn button ISO sensitivity 265
f2 Assign AE-L/AF-L button AE/AF lock 267
f3 Assign touch Fn Viewfinder grid display 268
f4 Reverse dial rotation Exposure compensation: U
Shutter speed/aperture: U269
* Available only with lenses that support this item.
Reset Custom Settings
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
a: Autofocus
a1: AF-C Priority Selection
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
Option Description
GRelease Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release
button is pressed.
FFocus Photos can only be taken once the camera has
focused.
Custom Setting Default 0
249ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose the number of focus points available for manual focus-
point selection.
a2: Number of Focus Points
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
Option Description
#39 points
Choose from the 39 focus
points shown at right.
A11 points
Choose from the 11 focus
points shown at right.
Use for quick focus-point
selection.
250 ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose whether the built-in AF-assist
illuminator lights to assist the focus
operation when lighting is poor.
Choose On to use the exposure indicator to determine whether
the camera is correctly focused in manual focus mode (088;
note that this function is not available in shooting mode M, when
the exposure indicator instead shows whether the subject is
correctly exposed).
a3: Built-in AF-assist Illuminator
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
Option Description
On The AF-assist illuminator lights when lighting is poor (for
more information, see page 352).
Off
The AF-assist illuminator does not light to assist the focus
operation.
The camera may not be able to focus using
autofocus when lighting is poor.
a4: Rangefinder
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
Indicator Description
Subject in focus.
Focus point is slightly in front of subject.
251ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
This item is displayed only with lenses that support it. Selecting
Enable allows the lens focus ring to be used for manual focus
when the camera is in autofocus mode. After pressing the
shutter-release button halfway to focus, keep the button
pressed halfway and adjust focus using the focus ring. To refocus
using autofocus, lift your finger from the shutter-release button
and then press it halfway again. To prevent the lens focus ring
being used for manual focus when the camera is in autofocus
mode, select Disable.
Focus point is well in front of subject.
Focus point is slightly behind subject.
Focus point is well behind subject.
Camera can not determine correct focus.
AUsing the Electronic Rangefinder
The electronic rangefinder requires a lens with a maximum aperture of
f/5.6 or faster.
The desired results may not be achieved in situations in
which the camera would be unable to focus using autofocus (080).
The electronic rangefinder is not available during live view.
a5: Manual Focus Ring in AF Mode
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
Indicator Description
252 ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Select the increments used when making adjustments to shutter
speed, aperture, exposure and flash compensation, and
bracketing.
Select On to display ISO sensitivity in the viewfinder in place of
the number of exposures remaining.
If On is selected, exposure will lock when the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway.
b: Exposure
b1: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
b2: ISO Display
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
c: Timers/AE Lock
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
253ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
This option determines how long the monitor remains on if no
operations are performed during menu display and playback
(Playback/menus), while photographs are displayed in the
monitor after shooting (Image review), and during live view
(Live view), and how long the standby timer, viewfinder, and
information display remain on when no operations are
performed (Standby timer).
Choose shorter auto-off delays to
reduce the drain on the battery.
c2: Auto off Timers
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
Option Description (all times are approximate)
CShort
DNormal
ELong
Auto off timers are set to the following values:
Playback/
menus
Image
review Live view Standby
timer
Short 20 s 4 s 5 min. 4 s
Normal 5min. 4s 10min. 8s
Long 10 min. 20 s 20 min. 1 min.
FCustom
Choose separate delays for Playback/menus, Image
review, Live view, and Standby timer.
When settings
are complete, press J.
AAuto off Timers
The monitor and viewfinder will not turn off automatically when the
camera is connected to a computer or printer via USB.
254 ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose the length of the shutter release delay and the number
of shots taken.
•Self-timer delay: Choose the length of the shutter-release delay.
•Number of shots: Press 1 and 3 to choose the number of shots
taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed (from 1
to 9; if a value other than 1 is selected, shots will be taken at
intervals of about 4 seconds).
Choose how long the camera will wait for a signal from the
optional ML-L3 remote control before cancelling remote release
mode.
Choose shorter times for longer battery life.
This setting
applies only during viewfinder photography.
In situations where the slightest camera movement can blur
pictures, select On to delay shutter release until about 1 s after
the shutter-release button is pressed and the mirror is raised.
c3: Self-Timer
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
c4: Remote on Duration (ML-L3)
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
d: Shooting/Display
d1: Exposure Delay Mode
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
255ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
When a photograph is taken, the camera names the file by
adding one to the last file number used.
This option controls
whether file numbering continues from the last number used
when a new folder is created, the memory card is formatted, or a
new memory card is inserted in the camera.
d2: File Number Sequence
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
Option Description
On
When a new folder is created, the memory card formatted, or
a new memory card inserted in the camera, file numbering
continues from the last number used or from the largest file
number in the current folder, whichever is higher.
If a
photograph is taken when the current folder contains a
photograph numbered 9999, a new folder will be created
automatically and file numbering will begin again from 0001.
Off
File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is created,
the memory card is formatted, or a new memory card is
inserted in the camera.
Note that a new folder is created
automatically if a photograph is taken when the current
folder contains 999 photographs.
Reset
As for On, except that the next photograph taken is assigned
a file number by adding one to the largest file number in the
current folder. If the folder is empty, file numbering is reset to
0001.
DFile Number Sequence
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 999
photographs or a photograph numbered 9999, the shutter-release
button will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken.
Choose Reset for Custom Setting d2 (File number sequence) and
then either format the current memory card or insert a new memory
card.
256 ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose On to display on-demand grid lines in the viewfinder for
reference when composing photographs (05).
Choose the date information imprinted on photographs as they
are taken.
Date stamps can not be added to or removed from
existing photos.
At settings other than Off, the selected
option is indicated by a d icon in the
information display.
d3: Viewfinder Grid Display
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
d4: Date Stamp
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
Option Description
Off The time and date do not appear on photographs.
aDate The date or date and time
are imprinted on
photographs taken while
this option is in effect.
bDate and
time
cDate
counter
New photos are imprinted with a time stamp
showing the number of days between the date of
shooting and a selected date (see below).
ADate Stamp
The date is recorded in the order selected for Time zone and date
(0275).
The imprinted data may be cropped out or rendered illegible
in copies created when images are retouched (0286).
The date does
not appear on NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW)+JPEG images.
1515
.
1010
.
2014201415
.
10
.
2014
1515
.
1010
.
2014 102014 10
:02:0215
.
10
.
2014 10
:02
257ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
❚❚ Date Counter
Pictures taken while this option is in
effect are imprinted with the number of
days remaining until a future date or the
number of days elapsed since a past date.
Use it to track the growth of a child or
count down the days until a birthday or
wedding.
The camera offers three slots for storing dates.
1Enter the first date.
The first time you select Date counter,
you will be prompted to enter a date
for the first slot.
Enter a date using the
multi selector and press J to exit to
the date list.
2Enter additional dates or edit
existing dates.
To change a date or enter additional
dates, highlight a slot, press 2, and
enter a date as described above.
3Choose a date.
Highlight a slot in the date list and press J.
Future date (two days remaining) Past date (two days elapsed)
0202
/
1515
.
1010
.
2014201402
/
15
.
10
.
2014
0202
/
1919
.
1010
.
2014201402
/
19
.
10
.
2014
258 ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
4Choose a date counter format.
Highlight Display options and press
2, then highlight a date format and
press J.
5Exit the date counter menu.
Press J to exit the date counter menu.
If (V) is selected, the exposure indicators in
the viewfinder and information display are displayed with
positive values on the left and negative values on the right.
Select (W) to display negative values on
the left and positive values on the right.
d5: Reverse Indicators
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
259ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose the flash mode for the built-in flash in P, S, A, and M
modes.
When an optional SB-500, SB-400, or SB-300 flash unit is
attached and turned on, this option changes to Optional flash
and is used to choose the flash mode for the optional flash unit.
e: Bracketing/Flash
e1: Flash Cntrl for Built-in Flash/Optional Flash
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
Option Description
1TTL Flash output is adjusted automatically in response
to shooting conditions.
2Manual
Choose a flash level.
At full power, the built-in
flash has a Guide Number of 12/39 (m/ft., ISO 100,
20 °C/68 °F).
4Commander
mode
This option is available when an optional SB-500
flash unit is mounted on the camera accessory
shoe.
In commander mode, the SB-500 functions
as a master flash for wireless remote control of
groups of optional off-camera flash units (0260).
AManual
A Y icon flashes in the viewfinder and 0
flashes in the information display when
Manual is selected and the flash is raised.
260 ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
❚❚ Commander Mode
When an optional SB-500 flash unit is mounted on the accessory
shoe, select Commander mode to use the SB-500 as a master
flash controlling one or more remote optional flash units in up to
two groups (A and B) using advanced wireless lighting (0325).
Selecting this option displays the menu
shown at right.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight
the following options, 1 or 3 to change.
ATTL Flash Control
The following types of flash control are supported when a CPU lens is
used in combination with the built-in flash (093) or optional flash
units (0323).
•i-TTL Balanced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Information from the 2016-pixel
RGB sensor is used to adjust flash output for a natural balance
between the main subject and the background.
•Standard i-TTL Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Flash output is adjusted for the
main subject; the brightness of the background is not taken into
account.
Standard i-TTL flash control is used with spot metering or when
selected with the optional flash unit.
i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital
SLR is used in all other cases.
261ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Option Description
Optional
flash Choose a flash mode for the master (commander) flash.
TTL i-TTL mode.
Choose flash compensation from values
between +3.0 and –3.0 EV in increments of 1
/
3EV.
MChoose the flash level.
–– Only the remote flash units fire; the master flash does not,
although it does emit monitor pre-flashes.
Group A Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group A.
TTL i-TTL mode.
Choose flash compensation from values
between +3.0 and –3.0 EV in increments of 1
/
3EV.
AA
Auto aperture (available only with compatible flash units;
0325).
Choose flash compensation from values between
+3.0 and –3.0 EV in increments of 1
/
3EV.
MChoose the flash level.
–– The flash units in this group do not fire.
Group B
Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group B.
The
options available are the same as those listed for Group A,
above.
Channel Choose from channels 1–4.
All flash units in both groups
must be set to the same channel.
262 ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Follow the steps below to take photographs in commander
mode.
1Adjust settings for the master flash.
Choose the flash control mode and
output level for the master flash.
Note
that output level can not be adjusted
in –– mode.
2Adjust settings for group A.
Choose the flash control mode and
output level for the flash units in
group A.
3Adjust settings for group B.
Choose the flash control mode and
output level for the flash units in
group B.
4Select the channel.
If the remote flash units include an
SB-500, select channel 3.
5Press J.
263ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
6Compose the shot.
Compose the shot and arrange the flash units as shown
below.
Note that the maximum distance at which the remote
flash units can be placed may vary with shooting conditions.
7Configure the remote flash units.
Turn all the remote flash units on, adjust group settings as
desired, and set them to the channel selected in Step 4. See
the flash unit instruction manuals for details.
8Frame the photograph, focus, and shoot.
After confirming that the camera flash-ready light and the
flash-ready lights for all flash units are lit, frame the
photograph, focus, and shoot.
AThe Flash Sync Mode Display
M does not appear in the information display when –– is selected for
Optional flash >Mode.
60 ° or less
Master flash
(SB-500, mounted on camera)
Wireless remote sensors on flash units
should face camera
Group B: 7 m/22 ft or less
Group A: 10 m/32 ft or less
264 ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose the setting (exposure, white balance, or Active
D-Lighting) varied when bracketing is in effect (0148).
AFlash Compensation
The flash compensation value selected with the M (Y) and E (N)
buttons and command dial is added to the flash compensation values
selected for the master flash, group A, and group B in the Commander
mode menu.
A Y icon is displayed in the viewfinder when a flash
compensation value other than ±0 is selected for the master or remote
flash units in TTL or AA mode.
The Y icon flashes when the master
flash is in mode M.
DCommander Mode
Position the sensor windows on the remote flash units to pick up the
light from the master flash (particular care is required if the camera is
not mounted on a tripod).
The remote flash units should normally be
placed closer to the subject than to the camera.
Be sure that direct
light or strong reflections from the remote flash units do not enter the
camera lens (in TTL mode) or the photocells on the remote flash units
(AA mode), as this may interfere with exposure.
To prevent timing
flashes emitted by the master flash from appearing in photographs
taken at short range, choose low ISO sensitivities or small apertures
(high f-numbers) or rotate the flash head on the master flash to point
upwards.
After positioning the remote flash units, take a test shot and
view the results in the camera monitor.
Although there is no limit on the number of remote flash units that
may be used, the practical maximum is three.
With more than this
number, the light emitted by the remote flash units will interfere with
performance.
e2: Auto Bracketing Set
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
265ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose the role played by the Fn button.
f: Controls
f1: Assign Fn Button
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
Option Description
vImage
quality/size
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the
command dial to select image quality and size
(090).
wISO
sensitivity
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the
command dial to select ISO sensitivity (099).
mWhite
balance
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the
command dial to select white balance (P, S, A, and M
modes only; 0137).
!Active
D-Lighting
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the
command dial to select Active D-Lighting (P, S, A,
and M modes only; 0133).
$HDR
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the
command dial to adjust HDR (P, S, A, and M modes
only; 0135).
&+NEF (RAW)
If image quality is set to JPEG fine, JPEG normal,
or JPEG basic, an NEF (RAW) copy will be recorded
with the next picture taken after the Fn button is
pressed.
To exit without recording an NEF (RAW)
copy, press the Fn button again.
This option has no
effect in the following special effects modes: %, S,
T, U, ', (, and 3.
Fn button
266 ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
tAuto
bracketing
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the
command dial to choose the bracketing increment
(exposure and white balance bracketing) or to turn
ADL bracketing on or off (P, S, A, and M modes only;
0148).
"AF-area
mode
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the
command dial to choose an AF-area mode (082).
'Viewfinder
grid display
Press the Fn button to
display or hide the
viewfinder framing grid.
cWi-Fi Press the Fn button to display the Wi-Fi menu
(0226).
Option Description
267ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose the role played by the A (L)
button.
f2: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
Option Description
BAE/AF lock Focus and exposure lock while the A (L) button
is pressed.
CAE lock only Exposure locks while the A (L) button is pressed.
EAE lock
(Hold)
Exposure locks when the A (L) button is
pressed, and remains locked until the button is
pressed a second time or the standby timer
expires.
FAF lock only Focus locks while the A (L) button is pressed.
AAF-ON The A (L) button initiates autofocus.
The
shutter-release button can not be used to focus.
A (L) button
268 ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
A touch-sensitive area of the monitor can be used to control the
camera after the monitor has turned off automatically. The
position of this “touch Fn” area varies with the position of the
monitor; the role it plays can be chosen from the options in the
table below.
Slide your finger left or right across the area
indicated in the illustration to adjust the chosen option (note
that touch Fn is not available when the monitor is facing
forward).
If you find that your face contacts the touch Fn area
when you look through the viewfinder, use the monitor in the
extended position.
f3: Assign Touch Fn
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
Touch Fn area
Monitor in normal position Monitor extended
Option Description
#Focus-point
selection
When an option other than e (Auto-area AF) is
selected for AF-area mode, you can slide a finger
over the touch Fn area to position the focus point
(085).
wISO
sensitivity
Slide a finger over the touch Fn area to adjust ISO
sensitivity (099).
!Active
D-Lighting
Slide a finger over the touch Fn area to adjust
Active D-Lighting (P, S, A, and M modes only;
0133).
$HDR Slide a finger over the touch Fn area to adjust HDR
(P, S, A, and M modes only; 0135).
269ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Reverse the direction of rotation of the
command dial when it is used to make
adjustments to exposure or flash
compensation (Exposure
compensation) and/or shutter speed
and aperture (Shutter speed/aperture).
Highlight options and press 2 to select or deselect, then press
J.
tAuto
bracketing
Slide a finger over the touch Fn area to choose the
bracketing increment (exposure and white
balance bracketing) or to turn ADL bracketing on
or off (P, S, A, and M modes only; 0148).
"AF-area
mode
Slide a finger over the touch Fn area to choose an
AF-area mode (082).
'Viewfinder
grid display
Tap the touch Fn area to
display or hide the
viewfinder framing grid.
%Aperture Slide a finger over the touch Fn area to adjust
aperture (A and M modes only; 0118, 119).
None Disable touch Fn.
DTouch Fn
Touch Fn is available only if Enable is selected for Touch controls
(0276) and Info display auto off (0278) is on.
f4: Reverse Dial Rotation
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
Option Description
270 BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
To display the setup menu, press G and select the B (setup
menu) tab.
Setup Menu Options
The setup menu contains the following options:
BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
G button
Option Default 0
Format memory card —272
Image comment —273
Copyright information —274
Time zone and date 1
Daylight saving time Off 275
Language 1—275
Beep options
Beep on/off On 276
Pitch Low 276
Touch controls Enable 276
Monitor brightness 0276
Info display format
AUTO/SCENE/EFFECTS Graphic 277
P/S/A/M Graphic
Auto info display On 278
Info display auto off On 278
Clean image sensor
Clean at startup/shutdown Clean at startup &
shutdown 338
271BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
1 Default varies with country of purchase.
2 Not available when battery is low.
3 Only available when compatible Eye-Fi memory card is inserted.
Note: Depending on camera settings, some items may be grayed out and
unavailable.
Lock mirror up for cleaning 2—340
Image Dust Off ref photo —279
Flicker reduction Auto 281
Slot empty release lock Release locked 281
Video mode 1—281
HDMI
Output resolution Auto 223
Device control On
Accessory terminal
Remote control
Remote shutter release Take photos 282
Assign Fn button Same as camera 4 button 282
Location data
Standby timer Enable 283
Set clock from satellite Yes 283
Wi-Fi
Network connection Disable 226
Network settings —
Eye-Fi upload 3Enable 284
Conformity marking —285
Firmware version —285
Option Default 0
272 BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Memory cards must be formatted before first use or after being
formatted in other devices.
Format the card as described below.
1Highlight Yes.
To exit without formatting the
memory card, highlight No and press
J.
2Press J.
A message will be displayed while the
card is formatted.
Do not remove the
memory card or remove or disconnect
the power source until formatting is
complete.
Format Memory Card
G button ➜Bsetup menu
DFormatting Memory Cards
Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they may
contain.
Be sure to copy any photographs and other data you wish to
keep to a computer before proceeding (0211).
273BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken.
Comments can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX 2 or
Capture NX-D (0210).
The comment is also visible on the
shooting data page in the photo information display (0197).
The following options are available:
•Input comment: Input a comment as described on page 159.
Comments can be up to 36 characters long.
•Attach comment: Select this option to
attach the comment to all subsequent
photographs.
Attach comment can
be turned on and off by highlighting it
and pressing 2.
After choosing the
desired setting, press J to exit.
Image Comment
G button ➜Bsetup menu
274 BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Add copyright information to new photographs as they are
taken.
Copyright information is included in the shooting data
shown in the photo information display (0197) and can be
viewed as metadata in ViewNX 2 or in Capture NX-D (0210).
The following options are available:
•Artist: Enter a photographer name as described on page 159.
Photographer names can be up to 36 characters long.
•Copyright: Enter the name of the copyright holder as described
on page 159.
Copyright holder names can be up to 54
characters long.
•Attach copyright information: Select this
option to attach copyright
information to all subsequent
photographs.
Attach copyright
information can be turned on and off
by highlighting it and pressing 2.
After choosing the desired setting,
press J to exit.
Copyright Information
G button ➜Bsetup menu
DCopyright Information
To prevent unauthorized use of the artist or copyright holder names,
make sure that Attach copyright information is not selected and that
the Artist and Copyright fields are blank before lending or
transferring the camera to another person.
Nikon does not accept
liability for any damages or disputes arising from the use of the
Copyright information option.
275BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Change time zones, set the camera clock, choose the date
display order, and turn daylight saving time on or off.
Choose a language for camera menus and messages.
Time Zone and Date
G button ➜Bsetup menu
Option Description
Time zone Choose a time zone.
The camera clock is
automatically set to the time in the new time zone.
Date and time Set the camera clock (032).
Date format Choose the order in which the day, month, and year
are displayed.
Daylight saving
time
Turn daylight saving time on or off.
The camera
clock will automatically be advanced or set back one
hour.
Language
G button ➜Bsetup menu
276 BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Beeps sound when the camera focuses, in self-timer and remote-
control modes, and when touch-screen controls are used.
❚❚ Beep On/Off
Select Off (touch controls only) to mute
the sounds the camera makes in
response to touch-screen controls, or
choose Off to prevent beeps from
sounding altogether.
❚❚ Pitch
Choose the pitch (High or Low) of the sounds made in response
to focus, self-timer, and remote-control operations.
Select Disable to prevent accidental use of touch-screen
controls (017), or Playback only to enable touch-screen
controls in playback mode only.
Press 1 or 3 to choose monitor brightness.
Choose higher
values for increased brightness, lower values for reduced
brightness.
Beep Options
G button ➜Bsetup menu
Touch Controls
G button ➜Bsetup menu
Monitor Brightness
G button ➜Bsetup menu
277BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Choose an information display format (08).
Formats can be
chosen separately for auto, scene, and special effects modes and
for P, S, A, and M modes.
1Select a shooting mode option.
Highlight AUTO/SCENE/EFFECTS or
P/S/A/M and press 2.
2Select a design.
Highlight a design and press J.
Info Display Format
G button ➜Bsetup menu
Classic Graphic
278 BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
If On is selected, the information display will appear after the
shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
If Off is selected, the
information display can be viewed by pressing the R button.
If On is selected, the eye sensor will turn the information display
off when you put your eye to the viewfinder.
Selecting Off
prevents the display turning off when you look through the
viewfinder, but also increases the drain on the battery.
Auto Info Display
G button ➜Bsetup menu
Info Display Auto Off
G button ➜Bsetup menu
279BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in
Capture NX-D (0210; for more information, refer to
Capture NX-D on-line help).
Image Dust Off ref photo is available only when a CPU lens is
mounted on the camera.
A lens with a focal length of at least
50 mm is recommended.
When using a zoom lens, zoom all the
way in.
1Choose a start option.
Highlight one of the following options
and press J.
To exit without
acquiring image dust off data, press
G.
•Start: The message shown at right
will be displayed and “rEF” will
appear in the viewfinder.
•Clean sensor and then start: Select this
option to clean the image sensor
before starting.
The message shown
at right will be displayed and “rEF”
will appear in the viewfinder when cleaning is complete.
Image Dust Off Ref Photo
G button ➜Bsetup menu
DImage Sensor Cleaning
Image Dust Off reference data recorded before image sensor
cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken
after image sensor cleaning is performed.
Select Clean sensor and
then start only if the Image Dust Off reference data will not be
used with existing photographs.
280 BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
2Frame a featureless white object in the viewfinder.
With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a well-
lit, featureless white object, frame the object so that it fills the
viewfinder and then press the shutter-release button
halfway.
In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity;
in manual focus mode, set focus to infinity manually.
3Acquire Image Dust Off reference data.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to
acquire Image Dust Off reference data.
If the reference object is too bright or
too dark, the camera may be unable to
acquire Image Dust Off reference data
and the message shown at right will
be displayed.
Choose another
reference object and repeat the
process from step 1.
DImage Dust Off Reference Data
The same reference data can be used for
photographs taken with different lenses or
at different apertures.
Reference images can
not be viewed using computer imaging
software.
A grid pattern is displayed when
reference images are viewed on the camera.
281BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Reduce flicker and banding when shooting under fluorescent or
mercury-vapor lighting during live view (0162) or movie
recording (0174).
Choose Auto to allow the camera to
automatically choose the correct frequency, or manually match
the frequency to that of the local AC power supply.
Selecting Enable release allows the shutter to be released when
no memory card is inserted, although no pictures will be
recorded (they will however be displayed in the monitor in
demo mode).
If Release locked is selected, the shutter-release
button is only enabled when a memory card is inserted in the
camera.
When connecting the camera to a television or VCR, be sure the
camera video mode matches the device video standard (NTSC or
PAL).
Flicker Reduction
G button ➜Bsetup menu
AFlicker Reduction
If Auto fails to produce the desired results and you are unsure as to the
frequency of the local power supply, test both the 50 and 60 Hz
options and choose the one that produces the best results.
Flicker
reduction may not produce the desired results if the subject is very
bright, in which case you should select mode A or M and choose a
smaller aperture (higher f-number) before starting live view.
Note that
flicker reduction is not available when On is selected for Movie
settings > Manual movie settings (0179) in mode M.
Slot Empty Release Lock
G button ➜Bsetup menu
Video Mode
G button ➜Bsetup menu
282 BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Choose the role of the optional accessory connected to the
accessory terminal.
❚❚ Remote Control
Choose the functions performed using a remote cord or wireless
remote controller (0332).
Remote Shutter Release
Choose whether the shutter-release button on the optional
accessory is used for photography or movie recording.
Assign Fn button
Choose the role played by the Fn buttons on wireless remote
controllers.
Accessory Terminal
G button ➜Bsetup menu
Option Description
yTake photos The shutter-release button on the optional
accessory is used to take photographs.
zRecord movies
The shutter-release button on the optional
accessory is used for movie recording.
Press the
button halfway to start live view or to focus in
AF-S and AF-F modes.
Press the button all the
way down to start or end recording.
Use the
camera live view switch to end live view.
Option Description
=4Same as camera
4 button
The Fn button on the wireless remote controller
performs the function currently assigned to the
camera A (L) button (0267).
aLive view The Fn button on the wireless remote controller
can be used to start and end live view.
283BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
❚❚ Location Data
This item is used to adjust settings for optional GP-1 or GP-1A
GPS units (0333).
The unit can be connected to the camera’s
accessory terminal (0333) using the cable supplied with the
device, allowing information on the camera’s current position to
be recorded when photographs are taken (turn the camera off
before connecting the unit; for more information, see the
manual provided with the device).
The Location data menu contains the options listed below.
•Standby timer: Choose whether or not the standby timer is
enabled when the unit is attached.
•Position: This item is only available if a GP-1 or GP-1A is
connected, when it displays the current latitude, longitude,
altitude, and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) as reported by
the unit.
•Set clock from satellite: Choose Ye s to set the camera clock based
on the time provided by the satellite navigation system.
Option Description
Enable
Standby timer enabled. The timer expires automatically if
no operations are performed for the time selected for
Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers) > Standby timer
(0253; to allow the camera time to acquire location data,
the delay is extended by up to one minute after standby
timer is activated or the camera is turned on).
This
reduces the drain on the battery. Note that the unit will
remain active to acquire location data for a set period after
the timer expires.
Disable Standby timer disabled, ensuring uninterrupted recording
of location data.
ACoordinated Universal Time (UTC)
UTC data is provided by the location data satellite system and is
independent of the camera clock.
284 BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
This option is displayed only when an Eye-Fi memory card
(available separately from third-party suppliers) is inserted in the
camera.
Choose Enable to upload photographs to a preselected
destination.
Note that pictures will not be uploaded if signal
strength is insufficient.
Observe all local laws concerning wireless devices and choose
Disable where wireless devices are prohibited.
When an Eye-Fi card is inserted, its status
is indicated by an icon in the information
display:
•d: Eye-Fi upload disabled.
•e: Eye-Fi upload enabled but no
pictures available for upload.
•f (static): Eye-Fi upload enabled;
waiting to begin upload.
•f (animated): Eye-Fi upload enabled; uploading data.
•g: Error.
AThe Satellite Signal Indicator
Connection status is shown in the
information display as follows:
•% (static): Location data acquired.
•% (flashing): The GP-1/GP-1A is searching
for a signal.
Pictures taken while the icon is
flashing do not include location data.
•No icon: No new location data have been
received from the GP-1/GP-1A for at least two seconds.
Pictures
taken when the % icon is not displayed do not include location data.
Eye-Fi Upload
G button ➜Bsetup menu
285BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
View the standards with which the camera complies.
View the current camera firmware version.
DEye-Fi Cards
Eye-Fi cards may emit wireless signals when Disable is selected.
If a
warning is displayed in the monitor (0359), turn the camera off and
remove the card.
Set Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers) > Standby timer (0253) to
30 s or more when using an Eye-Fi card.
See the manual provided with the Eye-Fi card, and direct any inquiries
to the manufacturer.
The camera can be used to turn Eye-Fi cards on
and off, but may not support other Eye-Fi functions.
Some cards may not be available in some countries or regions; consult
the manufacturer for more information.
Eye-Fi cards are for use only in
the country of purchase. Be sure the Eye-Fi card firmware has been
updated to the latest version.
Conformity Marking
G button ➜Bsetup menu
Firmware Version
G button ➜Bsetup menu
286 NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
To display the retouch menu, press G and select the N
(retouch menu) tab.
Retouch Menu Options
The options in the retouch menu are used to create trimmed or
retouched copies of existing pictures.
The retouch menu is only
displayed when a memory card containing photographs is
inserted in the camera.
* Available only if retouch menu is displayed by pressing P and selecting
Retouch in full-frame playback when a retouched image or original is
displayed.
NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
G button
Option 0
0NEF (RAW)
processing 289
kTrim 291
1Resize 292
iD-Lighting 294
2Quick retouch 295
jRed-eye correction 295
eStraighten 296
(Distortion control 296
rPerspective control 297
)Fisheye 297
mFilter effects 298
lMonochrome 299
oImage overlay 300
qColor outline 302
UPhoto illustration 303
gColor sketch 303
uMiniature effect 304
3Selective color 305
)Painting 307
fEdit movie 183
pSide-by-side
comparison *307
Option 0
287NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
ARetouching Copies
Most options can be applied to copies created using other retouch
options, although with the exceptions of Image overlay and Edit
movie > Choose start/end point, each option can be applied only
once (note that multiple edits may result in loss of detail).
Options that
can not be applied to the current image are grayed out and
unavailable.
AImage Quality and Size
Except in the case of copies created with Trim and Resize, copies
created from JPEG images are the same size as the original, while
copies created from NEF (RAW) photos are saved as large fine-quality
JPEG images.
288 NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Creating Retouched Copies
To create a retouched copy:
1Display retouch options.
Highlight the desired item in the
retouch menu and press 2.
2Select a picture.
Highlight a picture and press J (to
view the highlighted picture full
screen, press and hold the X button).
3Select retouch options.
For more information, see the section for the selected item.
To exit without creating a retouched copy, press G.
ARetouch
The camera may not be able to display or retouch images created
with other devices.
If the image was recorded at image quality
settings of NEF (RAW) + JPEG (090), retouch options apply only to
the RAW copy.
289NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
4Create a retouched copy.
Press J to create a retouched copy.
Except in the photo information
“image only” page (0192),
retouched copies are indicated by a Z
icon.
Create JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) photographs.
1Select NEF (RAW) processing.
Highlight NEF (RAW) processing in
the retouch menu and press 2 to
display a picture selection dialog
listing only NEF (RAW) images created
with this camera.
2Select a photograph.
Use the multi selector to highlight a
photograph (to view the highlighted
photograph full frame, press and hold
the X button).
Press J to select the
highlighted photograph and proceed
to the next step.
ACreating Retouched Copies During Playback
To create a retouched copy of the picture currently displayed in full-
frame playback (0188), press P, then highlight Retouch and press 2
and select a retouch option (Image overlay excluded).
NEF (RAW) Processing
G button ➜Nretouch menu
290 NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
3Choose settings for the JPEG copy.
Adjust the settings listed below.
Note that white balance and
vignette control are not available with pictures created with
image overlay (0300), and that the effects of exposure
compensation may differ from those that might have been
expected when the photograph was taken.
4Copy the photograph.
Highlight EXE and press J to create a
JPEG copy of the selected
photograph.
To exit without copying
the photograph, press the G
button.
Color space (0243)
Image size (092)
Image quality (090)
White balance (0137)
Exposure compensation (0129)
Picture Control (0152)
High ISO NR (0244)
D-Lighting (0294)
Vignette control (0244)
291NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Create a cropped copy of the selected
photograph.
The selected photograph is
displayed with the selected crop shown
in yellow; create a cropped copy as
described in the following table.
Trim
G button ➜Nretouch menu
To Use Description
Increase size of
crop XPress the X button to increase the size of the
crop.
Reduce size of
crop W (Q)Press the W (Q) button to reduce the size of
the crop.
Change crop
aspect ratio
Rotate the command dial to choose the
aspect ratio.
Move crop Use multi selector to position the crop.
Create copy Save the current crop as a separate file.
AImage Size
The size of the copy (which varies with crop size and aspect ratio)
appears at upper left in the crop display.
AViewing Cropped Copies
Playback zoom may not be available when cropped copies are
displayed.
292 NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Create small copies of selected photographs.
1Select Resize.
To resize selected images, highlight
Resize in the retouch menu and press
2.
2Choose a size.
Highlight Choose size and press 2.
Highlight an option and press J.
Resize
G button ➜Nretouch menu
293NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
3Choose pictures.
Highlight Select image and press 2.
Highlight pictures using the multi
selector and press the W (Q) button
to select or deselect (to view the
highlighted picture full screen, press
and hold the X button).
Selected
pictures are marked by a 1 icon.
Press J when the selection is
complete.
4Save the resized copies.
A confirmation dialog will be
displayed.
Highlight Yes and press J
to save the resized copies.
AViewing Resized Copies
Playback zoom may not be available when resized copies are
displayed.
W (Q) button
294 NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
D-Lighting brightens shadows, making it ideal for dark or backlit
photographs.
Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of correction performed; the
effect can be previewed in the edit display.
Press J to copy the
photograph.
❚❚ Portrait Subjects
If Portrait subjects is selected, the
camera will apply D-Lighting only to
human portrait subjects, brightening up
to three such subjects while leaving the
background untouched for an effect
similar to that achieved with a reflector.
D-Lighting
G button ➜Nretouch menu
Before D-Lighting D-Lighting
(portrait subject)
APortrait Subjects
The camera automatically selects up to three subjects for portrait
D-Lighting (note that portrait D-Lighting can not be applied to photos
taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation in the playback
menu; 0235).
Depending on composition and how the subjects are
posed, the desired results may not be achieved; if you are not satisfied,
remove the check from Portrait subjects.
295NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Create copies with enhanced saturation
and contrast.
D-Lighting is applied as
required to brighten dark or backlit
subjects.
Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of
enhancement.
Press J to copy the
photograph.
This option is used to correct “red-eye” caused by the flash, and
is available only with photographs taken using the flash.
The
photograph selected for red-eye correction can be previewed in
the edit display.
Confirm the effects of red-eye correction and
press J to create a copy.
Note that red-eye correction may not
always produce the expected results and may in very rare
circumstances be applied to portions of the image that are not
affected by red-eye; check the preview thoroughly before
proceeding.
Quick Retouch
G button ➜Nretouch menu
Red-Eye Correction
G button ➜Nretouch menu
296 NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Create a straightened copy of the
selected image.
Press 2 to rotate the
image clockwise by up to five degrees in
increments of approximately 0.25
degrees, 4 to rotate it counterclockwise
(note that edges of the image will be
trimmed to create a rectangular copy).
Press J to save the
retouched copy.
Create copies with reduced peripheral
distortion.
Select Auto to let the camera
correct distortion automatically and then
make fine adjustments using the multi
selector, or select Manual to reduce
distortion manually (note that Auto is
not available with photos taken using auto distortion control;
see page 245).
Press 2 to reduce barrel distortion, 4 to reduce pin-cushion
distortion (note that greater amounts of distortion control result
in more of the edges being cropped out).
Press J to save the
retouched copy.
Straighten
G button ➜Nretouch menu
Distortion Control
G button ➜Nretouch menu
DAuto
Auto is for use only with pictures taken with type G, E, and D lenses
(PC, fisheye, and certain other lenses excluded); results are not
guaranteed with other lenses.
297NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Create copies that reduce the effects of
perspective taken from the base of a tall
object.
Use the multi selector to adjust
perspective (note that greater amounts
of perspective control result in more of
the edges being cropped out).
Press J
to save the retouched copy.
Create copies that appear to have been
taken with a fisheye lens.
Press 2 to
increase the effect (this also increases the
amount that will be cropped out at the
edges of the image), 4 to reduce it.
Press
J to save the retouched copy.
Perspective Control
G button ➜Nretouch menu
Before After
Fisheye
G button ➜Nretouch menu
298 NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
After adjusting filter effects as described below, press J to copy
the photograph.
Filter Effects
G button ➜Nretouch menu
Option Description
Skylight
Creates the effect of a
skylight filter, making the
picture less blue.
Warm filter
Creates a copy with warm
tone filter effects, giving the
copy a “warm” red cast.
Cross screen
Add starburst effects to
light sources.
•Number of points: Choose
from four, six, or eight.
•Filter amount: Choose the
brightness of the light
sources affected.
•Filter angle: Choose the angle of the points.
•Length of points: Choose the length of points.
•Confirm: Preview the effects of the filter.
Press X to
preview the copy full frame.
•Save: Create a retouched copy.
Soft
Add a soft filter effect.
Press
4 or 2 to choose the filter
strength.
299NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Copy photographs in Black-and-white,
Sepia, or Cyanotype (blue and white
monochrome).
Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype displays a
preview of the selected image; press 1
to increase color saturation, 3 to
decrease.
Press J to create a
monochrome copy.
Monochrome
G button ➜Nretouch menu
Increase saturation
Decrease saturation
300 NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Image overlay combines two existing NEF (RAW) photographs to
create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals;
the results, which make use of RAW data from the camera image
sensor, are noticeably better than overlays created in an imaging
application.
The new picture is saved at current image quality
and size settings; before creating an overlay, set image quality
and size (090, 92; all options are available).
To create an NEF
(RAW) copy, choose an image quality of NEF (RAW).
1Select Image overlay.
Highlight Image overlay in the
retouch menu and press 2.
The dialog shown at right will be
displayed, with Image 1 highlighted;
press J to display a list of the NEF
(RAW) pictures created with this
camera.
Image Overlay
G button ➜Nretouch menu
+
301NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
2Select the first image.
Use the multi selector to highlight the
first photograph in the overlay.
To
view the highlighted photograph full
frame, press and hold the X button.
Press J to select the highlighted
photograph and return to the preview display.
3Select the second image.
The selected image will appear as Image 1.
Highlight
Image 2 and press J, then select the second photo as
described in Step 2.
4Adjust gain.
Highlight Image 1 or Image 2 and
optimize exposure for the overlay by
pressing 1 or 3 to select gain from
values between 0.1 and 2.0.
Repeat
for the second image.
The default
value is 1.0; select 0.5 to halve gain or 2.0 to double it.
The
effects of gain are visible in the Preview column.
5Preview the overlay.
To preview the composition as shown
at right, press 4 or 2 to place the
cursor in the Preview column, then
press 1 or 3 to highlight Overlay
and press J (note that colors and
brightness in the preview may differ from the final image).
To
save the overlay without displaying a preview, select Save.
To
return to Step 4 and select new photos or adjust gain, press
W (Q).
302 NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
6Save the overlay.
Press J while the preview is
displayed to save the overlay.
After an
overlay is created, the resulting image
will be displayed full-frame in the
monitor.
Create an outline copy of a photograph
to use as a base for painting.
Press J to
save the retouched copy.
DImage Overlay
Only NEF (RAW) photographs with the same bit depth can be
combined (0240).
The overlay has the same photo info as the
photograph selected for Image 1.
The current image comment is
appended to the overlay when it is saved; copyright information,
however, is not copied.
Color Outline
G button ➜Nretouch menu
Before After
303NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Sharpen outlines and simplify coloring
for a poster effect.
Press 2 or 4 to make
outlines thicker or thinner.
Press J to
save the retouched copy.
Create a copy of a photograph that
resembles a sketch made with colored
pencils.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight
Vividness or Outlines and press 4 or 2
to change.
Vividness can be increased to
make colors more saturated, or
decreased for a washed-out,
monochromatic effect, while outlines can be made thicker or
thinner.
Thicker outlines make colors more saturated.
Press J
to save the retouched copy.
Photo Illustration
G button ➜Nretouch menu
Before After
Color Sketch
G button ➜Nretouch menu
304 NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Create a copy that appears to be a photo of a diorama.
Works
best with photos taken from a high vantage point.
The area that
will be in focus in the copy is indicated by a yellow frame.
Miniature Effect
G button ➜Nretouch menu
To Press Description
Choose
orientation W (Q)Press W (Q) to choose orientation of area that is
in focus.
Choose area
in focus
If area of effect is in
wide orientation, press
1 or 3 to position
frame showing area of
copy that will be in
focus.
If area of effect is in tall
orientation, press 4 or
2 to position frame
showing area of copy
that will be in focus.
Choose size
If area of effect is in wide orientation, press 4 or
2 to choose height.
If area of effect is in tall orientation, press 1 or
3 to choose width.
Create copy Create copy.
305NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Create a copy in which only selected hues appear in color.
1Select Selective color.
Highlight Selective color in the
retouch menu and press 2.
2Select a photograph.
Highlight a photograph and press J
(to view the highlighted photograph
full frame, press and hold the X
button).
3Select a color.
Use the multi selector to position the
cursor over an object and press A
(L) to select the color of the object
as one that will remain in the final
copy (the camera may have difficulty
detecting unsaturated colors; choose
a saturated color).
To zoom in on the
picture for precise color selection,
press X.
Press W (Q) to zoom out.
Selective Color
G button ➜Nretouch menu
A (L) button
Selected color
306 NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
4Highlight the color range.
Rotate the command dial to
highlight the color range for
the selected color.
5Choose the color range.
Press 1 or 3 to increase or decrease
the range of similar hues that will be
included in the final photograph.
Choose from values between 1 and 7;
note that higher values may include
hues from other colors.
6Select additional colors.
To select additional colors,
rotate the command dial to
highlight another of the
three color boxes at the top
of the display and repeat
Steps 3–5 to select another color.
Repeat for a third color if
desired.
To deselect the highlighted color, press O (To
remove all colors, press and hold O.
A confirmation dialog
will be displayed; select Yes ).
7Save the edited copy.
Press J to copy the photograph.
Color range
307NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Create a copy which emphasizes detail
and color for a painterly effect.
Press J
to save the retouched copy.
Compare retouched copies to the original photographs.
This
option is only available if the retouch menu is displayed by
pressing the P button and selecting Retouch when a copy or
original is played back full frame.
1Select a picture.
Select a retouched copy (shown by a
N icon) or a photograph that has
been retouched in full-frame
playback.
Press P, then highlight
Retouch and press 2.
Painting
G button ➜Nretouch menu
Before After
Side-by-side Comparison
P button
308 NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
2Select Side-by-side comparison.
Highlight Side-by-side comparison
in the retouch menu and press J.
3Compare the copy with the original.
The source image is displayed on the
left, the retouched copy on the right,
with the options used to create the
copy listed at the top of the display.
Press 4 or 2 to switch between the
source image and the retouched copy.
To view the highlighted picture full
frame, press and hold the X button.
If
the copy was created from two
images using Image overlay, press 1
or 3 to view the other source image.
If multiple copies exist
for the current source image, press 1 or 3 to view the other
copies.
Press J to return to playback with the highlighted
image displayed.
DSide-by-side comparison
The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a
photograph that has since been deleted or that was protected when
the copy was made (0202).
309mRecent Settings/OMy Menu
Both recent settings, a menu listing the 20 most recently used
settings, and My Menu, a custom menu listing up to 20 user-
selected options, can be accessed by pressing the G button
highlighting the last tab in the menu list (either m or O).
Choosing a Menu
Use the Choose tab option to choose the menu displayed.
1Select Choose tab.
Highlight Choose tab and press 2.
2Select a menu.
Highlight O MY MENU or m RECENT
SETTINGS and press J to display the
selected menu.
mRecent Settings/OMy Menu
G button
310 mRecent Settings/OMy Menu
m Recent Settings
When m RECENT SETTINGS is selected
for Choose tab, the menu lists the 20
most recently used settings, with the
most recently-used items first.
Press 1 or
3 to highlight an option and press 2 to
select.
O My Menu
Selecting O MY MENU for Choose tab lets you access a
customized menu of up to 20 options selected from the
playback, shooting, Custom Settings, setup, and retouch menus.
Follow the steps below to add items to, delete items from, and
reorder items in My Menu.
❚❚ Adding Options to My Menu
1Select Add items.
Highlight Add items and press 2.
2Select a menu.
Highlight the name of the menu
containing the option you wish to add
and press 2.
ARemoving Items from the Recent Settings Menu
To remove an item from the recent settings menu, highlight it and
press the O button.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O
again to delete the selected item.
311mRecent Settings/OMy Menu
3Select an item.
Highlight the desired menu item and
press J.
4Position the new item.
Press 1 or 3 to move the new item up
or down in My Menu.
Press J to add
the new item.
Repeat steps 1–4 to
select additional items.
AAdding Options to My Menu
The items currently displayed in My Menu
are indicated by a check mark.
Items
indicated by a V icon can not be selected.
312 mRecent Settings/OMy Menu
❚❚ Deleting Options from My Menu
1Select Remove items.
Highlight Remove items and press 2.
2Select items.
Highlight items and press 2 to select
or deselect.
Selected items are
indicated by a check mark.
3Delete the selected items.
Press J.
A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; press J again to delete the
selected items.
313mRecent Settings/OMy Menu
❚❚ Reordering Options in My Menu
1Select Rank items.
Highlight Rank items and press 2.
2Select an item.
Highlight the item you wish to move
and press J.
3Position the item.
Press 1 or 3 to move the item up or
down in My Menu and press J.
Repeat Steps 2–3 to reposition
additional items.
4Exit to My Menu.
Press the G button to return to My
Menu.
G button
314 Technical Notes
Technical Notes
Read this chapter for information on compatible accessories,
cleaning and storing the camera, and what to do if an error
message is displayed or you encounter problems using the
camera.
Compatible CPU Lenses
This camera supports autofocus with AF-S, AF-P, and AF-I CPU
lenses only.
AF-S lenses have names beginning with AF-S, AF-P
lenses with AF-P, and AF-I lenses with AF-I.
Autofocus is not
supported with other autofocus (AF) lenses.
The following table
lists the features available with compatible lenses in viewfinder
photography:
Compatible Lenses
Camera setting Focus mode Shooting
mode Metering system
AF
MF (with
electronic
rangefinder) MF M
Other
modes
LM
N
Lens/accessory 3D Color
AF-S, AF-P, AF-I NIKKOR z z zzzz—z1
Other type G or D AF NIKKOR — z zzzz—z1
PC-E NIKKOR series2, 3 —z4zzzz—z1
PC Micro 85mm f/2.8D 5—z4zz —z—z1
AF-S/AF-I teleconverter z6z6zzzz—z1
Other AF NIKKOR (except
lenses for F3AF) —z7zz z —✔z1
AI-P NIKKOR — z8zz z —✔z1
1 Spot metering meters selected focus point (0125).
2 The tilt knob for the PC-E NIKKOR 24mm f/3.5D ED may contact the camera body when the
lens is revolved.
315Technical Notes
3 Shifting and/or tilting the lens interferes with exposure.
4 Can not be used with shifting or tilting.
5 Optimal exposure will only be achieved if the lens is at maximum aperture and the lens is not
shifted or tilted.
6 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
7 When AF 80–200mm f/2.8, AF 35–70mm f/2.8, AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 (New), or
AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 lenses are zoomed all the way in at the minimum focus distance, the
in-focus indicator (I) may be displayed when the image on the matte screen in the
viewfinder is not in focus.
Before shooting, confirm that the image in the viewfinder screen is
in focus.
8 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
•Noise in the form of lines may appear during autofocus when movies
are recorded at high ISO sensitivities. Use manual focus or focus lock.
DIX NIKKOR Lenses
IX NIKKOR lenses can not be used.
AIdentifying CPU and Type G, E, and D Lenses
CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts, type G,
E, and D lenses by a letter on the lens barrel.
Type G and E lenses are
not equipped with a lens aperture ring.
CPU contacts Aperture ring
CPU lens Type G or E lens Type D lens
When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring, lock the
aperture ring at the minimum aperture (highest f-number).
AMatrix Metering
For matrix metering, the camera uses a 2016-pixel RGB sensor to set
exposure according to tone distribution, color, composition, and, with
type G, E, or D lenses, distance information (3D color matrix metering
II; with other CPU lenses, the camera uses color matrix metering II;
which does not include 3D distance information).
316 Technical Notes
Compatible Non-CPU Lenses
Non-CPU lenses may only be used when the camera is in mode
M.
Selecting another mode disables the shutter release.
Aperture must be adjusted manually via the lens aperture ring
and the camera metering system, i-TTL flash control, and other
features requiring a CPU lens can not be used.
Some non-CPU
lenses can not be used; see “Incompatible Accessories and
Non-CPU Lenses,” below.
Camera setting Focus mode Shooting mode
Lens/accessory AF
MF (with
electronic
rangefinder) MF M
Other
modes
AI-, AI-modified NIKKOR or Nikon
Series E lenses —z1zz
2—
Medical NIKKOR 120mm f/4 — zzz
2, 3 —
Reflex NIKKOR — — zz
2—
PC NIKKOR — z4zz
2—
AI-type Teleconverter — z5zz
2—
PB-6 Bellows Focusing
Attachment6—z1zz
2—
Auto extension rings (PK-series
11A, 12, or 13; PN-11) —z1zz
2—
1 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
2 Exposure indicator can not be used.
3 Can be used at shutter speeds slower than flash sync speed by one step or more.
4 Can not be used with shifting or tilting.
5 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
6 Attach in vertical orientation (can be used in horizontal orientation once attached).
317Technical Notes
DIncompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses
The following accessories and non-CPU lenses can NOT be used with
the D5500:
•TC-16A AF teleconverter
•Non-AI lenses
•Lenses that require the AU-1 focusing unit (400mm f/4.5,
600mm f/5.6, 800mm f/8, 1200mm f/11)
•Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 7.5mm f/5.6, 8mm f/8, OP 10mm f/5.6)
•2.1cm f/4
•Extension Ring K2
•180–600mm f/8 ED (serial numbers 174041–174180)
•360–1200mm f/11 ED (serial numbers 174031–174127)
•200–600mm f/9.5 (serial numbers 280001–300490)
•AF lenses for the F3AF (AF 80mm f/2.8, AF 200mm f/3.5 ED,
AF Teleconverter TC-16)
•PC 28mm f/4 (serial number 180900 or earlier)
•PC 35mm f/2.8 (serial numbers 851001–906200)
•PC 35mm f/3.5 (old type)
•Reflex 1000mm f/6.3 (old type)
•Reflex 1000mm f/11 (serial numbers 142361–143000)
•Reflex 2000mm f/11 (serial numbers 200111–200310)
318 Technical Notes
DAF-Assist Illumination
The AF-assist illuminator has a range of about 0.5–3.0 m (1 ft 8 in.–9 ft
10 in.); when using the illuminator, use a lens with a focal length of
18–200 mm and remove the lens hood. AF-assist illumination is not
available with the following lenses:
•AF-S NIKKOR 14–24mm f/2.8G ED
•AF-S NIKKOR 28–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
•AF-S DX NIKKOR 55–300mm f/4.5–5.6G ED VR
•AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 70–200mm f/2.8G IF-ED
•AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED VR II
•AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 80–200mm f/2.8D IF-ED
•AF-S NIKKOR 80–400mm f/4.5–5.6G ED VR
•AF-S VR Nikkor 200mm f/2G IF-ED
•AF-S NIKKOR 200mm f/2G ED VR II
•AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 200–400mm f/4G IF-ED
•AF-S NIKKOR 200–400mm f/4G ED VR II
319Technical Notes
At ranges under 1 m (3 ft 3 in.), the following lenses may block the
AF-assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is
poor:
•AF-S DX NIKKOR 10–24mm f/3.5–4.5G ED
•AF-S NIKKOR 16–35mm f/4G ED VR
•AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 17–35mm f/2.8D IF-ED
•AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 17–55mm f/2.8G IF-ED
•AF-S NIKKOR 18–35mm f/3.5–4.5G ED
•AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
•AF-S DX VR Zoom-Nikkor 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED
•AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II
•AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
•AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–300mm f/3.5–6.3G ED VR
•AF-S NIKKOR 20mm f/1.8G ED
•AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED
•AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED
•AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR
•AF-S NIKKOR 28mm f/1.8G
•AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 28–70mm f/2.8D IF-ED
•AF-S NIKKOR 35mm f/1.4G
•AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/4G ED
•AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/4G ED VR
•AF-S NIKKOR 85mm f/1.4G
•AF-S NIKKOR 85mm f/1.8G
•AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G IF-ED
320 Technical Notes
DThe Built-in Flash
The built-in flash can be used with lenses with focal lengths of
18–300 mm, although in some cases the flash may be unable to
entirely light the subject at some ranges or focal lengths due to
shadows cast by the lens (see the illustration below), while lenses that
block the subject’s view of the red-eye reduction lamp may interfere
with red-eye reduction.
Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows.
Shadow Vignetting
The flash has a minimum range of 0.6 m and can not be used in the
macro range of macro zoom lenses.
The flash may be unable to light
the entire subject with the following lenses at ranges less than those
given below:
Lens
Zoom
position
Minimum distance
without vignetting
AF-S DX NIKKOR 10–24mm f/3.5–4.5G ED 24 mm 1.5 m/ 4 ft 12 in.
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 12–24mm f/4G IF-ED 24 mm 1.0m/ 3ft 4in.
AF-S NIKKOR 16–35mm f/4G ED VR 35 mm 1.0m/ 3ft 4in.
AF-S DX NIKKOR 16–85mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR 24–85 mm No vignetting
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 17–35mm f/2.8D IF-ED 28 mm 1.0m/ 3ft 4in.
35 mm No vignetting
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 17–55mm f/2.8G IF-ED
28 mm 1.5 m/ 4 ft 12 in.
35 mm 1.0m/ 3ft 4in.
45–55 mm No vignetting
AF-S NIKKOR 18–35mm f/3.5–4.5G ED
24 mm 1.5 m/ 4 ft 12 in.
28 mm 1.0m/ 3ft 4in.
35 mm No vignetting
AF Zoom-Nikkor 18–35mm f/3.5–4.5D IF-ED 24 mm 1.0m/ 3ft 4in.
28–35 mm No vignetting
321Technical Notes
Lens
Zoom
position
Minimum distance
without vignetting
AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR,
AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G
18 mm 1.0 m / 3 ft 4 in.
24–55 mm No vignetting
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 18–70mm f/3.5–4.5G IF-ED 18 mm 1.0m/ 3ft 4in.
24–70 mm No vignetting
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
18 mm 2.5m/ 8ft 3in.
24 mm 1.0m/ 3ft 4in.
35–105 mm No vignetting
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 18–135mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED 18 mm 2.0 m/ 6 ft 7 in.
24–135 mm No vignetting
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR 24 mm 1.0m/ 3ft 4in.
35–140 mm No vignetting
AF-S DX VR Zoom-Nikkor 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED,
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II
24 mm 1.0m/ 3ft 4in.
35–200 mm No vignetting
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR 35–300 mm 1.0m/ 3ft 4in.
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–300mm f/3.5–6.3G ED VR 35–300 mm No vignetting
AF-S NIKKOR 20mm f/1.8G ED 20 mm 1.5 m/ 4 ft 12 in.
AF Zoom-Nikkor 20–35mm f/2.8D IF
24 mm 2.5m/ 8ft 3in.
28 mm 1.0m/ 3ft 4in.
35 mm No vignetting
AF-S NIKKOR 24mm f/1.4G ED 24 mm 1.0m/ 3ft 4in.
AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED 35 mm 1.5 m/ 4 ft 12 in.
50–70 mm No vignetting
AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED 24 mm 1.0m/ 3ft 4in.
28–120 mm No vignetting
AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR 24 mm 1.5 m/ 4 ft 12 in.
28–120 mm No vignetting
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 28–70mm f/2.8D IF-ED 35 mm 1.5 m/ 4 ft 12 in.
50–70 mm No vignetting
AF-S NIKKOR 28–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
28 mm 1.5 m/ 4 ft 12 in.
35 mm 1.0m/ 3ft 4in.
50–300 mm No vignetting
322 Technical Notes
Lens
Zoom
position
Minimum distance
without vignetting
AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 200–400mm f/4G IF-ED,
AF-S NIKKOR 200–400mm f/4G ED VR II
200 mm 4.0m/13ft 2in.
250 mm 3.0 m/ 9 ft 11 in.
300 mm 2.5m/ 8ft 3in.
PC-E NIKKOR 24mm f/3.5D ED * 24 mm 3.0 m/ 9 ft 11 in.
* When not shifted or tilted.
When used with the AF-S NIKKOR 14–24mm f/2.8G ED, the flash will be
unable to light the entire subject at all ranges.
ACalculating Angle of View
The size of the area exposed by a 35mm camera is 36 × 24 mm.
The
size of the area exposed by the D5500, in contrast, is 23.5 × 15.6 mm,
meaning that the angle of view of a 35mm camera is approximately 1.5
times that of the D5500.
The approximate focal length of lenses for the
D5500 in 35mm format can be calculated by multiplying the focal
length of the lens by about 1.5.
Picture size (35mm format)
Lens
(36 × 24 mm)
Picture diagonal
Picture size (D5500)
(23.5 × 15.6 mm)
Angle of view (35mm format)
Angle of view (D5500)
323Technical Notes
The camera supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)
and can be used with CLS-compatible flash units.
The built-in
flash will not fire when an optional flash unit is attached.
Flash Units Compatible with the Creative
Lighting System (CLS)
The camera can be used with the following CLS-compatible flash
units:
•The SU-800 wireless speedlight commander: When mounted on a
CLS-compatible camera, the SU-800 can be used as a
commander for remote SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700,
SB-600, SB-500, or SB-R200 flash units in up to three groups.
The SU-800 itself is not equipped with a flash.
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights)
Flash unit
SB-910,
SB-900 1
SB-800
SB-700 1
SB-600
SB-500 2
SB-400 3
SB-300 3
SB-R2004
Feature
Guide No. (ISO 100)534/111 38/125 28/92 30/98 24/78 21/69 18/59 10/33
1 If a color filter is attached to the SB-910, SB-900, or SB-700 when AUTO or N (flash) is
selected for white balance, the camera will automatically detect the filter and adjust white
balance appropriately.
2 Users of the LED light can set camera white balance to v or N for optimal results.
3 Wireless flash control is not available.
4 Controlled remotely using optional SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, or SB-500 flash unit or
SU-800 wireless Speedlight commander.
5 m/ft, 20 °C (68 °F), SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, and SB-600 at 35 mm zoom head
position; SB-910, SB-900, and SB-700 with standard illumination.
AThe Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)
Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) offers improved
communication between the camera and compatible flash units for
improved flash photography. Refer to the documentation provided
with the flash unit for details.
324 Technical Notes
AGuide Number
To calculate the range of the flash at full power, divide the Guide
Number by the aperture.
If, for example, the flash unit has a Guide
Number of 34 m or 111 ft (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F); its range at an aperture
of f/5.6 is 34÷5.6 or about 6.1 meters (or in feet,
111÷5.6=approximately 19 ft 10 in.).
For each twofold increase in ISO
sensitivity, multiply the Guide Number by the square root of two
(approximately 1.4).
325Technical Notes
The following features are available with CLS-compatible flash
units:
SB-910, SB-900,
SB-800
SB-700
SB-600
SB-500
SU-800
SB-R200
SB-400
SB-300
Single flash
i-TTL
i-TTL balanced fill-flash for
digital SLR1z zzz——zz
Standard i-TTL fill-flash for
digital SLR z2zz
2z——zz
AA
Auto aperture z3———————
A
Non-TTL auto z3———————
GN
Distance-priority manual zz——————
M
Manual zzzz
4——z4z4
RPT
Repeating flash z———————
Advanced Wireless Lighting
Master
Remote flash control zz—z4z———
i-TTL
i-TTL zz—z4————
[A:B]
Quick wireless flash control —z——z5———
AA
Auto aperture z6———————
A
Non-TTL auto z———————
M
Manual zz—z4————
RPT
Repeating flash z———————
Remote
i-TTL
i-TTL z zzz—z——
[A:B]
Quick wireless flash control z zzz—z——
AA
Auto aperture z6———————
A
Non-TTL auto z———————
M
Manual z zzz—z——
RPT
Repeating flash z zzz————
326 Technical Notes
1 Not available with spot metering.
2 Can also be selected with flash unit.
3 AA/A mode selection performed on flash unit using custom settings.
“A” will be selected
when a non-CPU lens is used.
4 Can only be selected with camera (0259).
5 Available only during close-up photography.
6 Non-TTL auto (A) is used with non-CPU lenses, regardless of mode selected with flash unit.
7 Available only in commander mode.
8 Firmware updates for the SB-910 and SB-900 can be performed from the camera.
Color Information Communication (flash) zzzz——zz
Color Information Communication (LED light) — — — z————
AF-assist for multi-area AF zzz—z7———
Red-eye reduction zzzz——z—
Camera flash mode selection — — — z——zz
Camera flash unit firmware update z8z—z———z
SB-910, SB-900,
SB-800
SB-700
SB-600
SB-500
SU-800
SB-R200
SB-400
SB-300
327Technical Notes
❚❚ Other Flash Units
The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto and
manual modes.
Use with the camera in exposure mode S or M
and a shutter speed of 1/200 s or slower selected.
Flash unit SB-80DX,
SB-28DX,
SB-28, SB-26,
SB-25, SB-24 SB-50DX1
SB-30, SB-27 2,
SB-22S, SB-22,
SB-20, SB-16B,
SB-15
SB-23,
SB-29 3,
SB-21B3,
SB-29S3
Flash mode
ANon-TTL auto z—z—
MManual zzz z
GRepeating flash z—— —
REAR Rear-curtain sync 4zzz z
1Select mode P, S, A, or M, lower built-in flash, and use optional flash unit only.
2 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter-release is disabled.
Set flash unit to A
(non-TTL auto flash).
3 Autofocus is available with AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G IF-ED and AF-S Micro NIKKOR
60mm f/2.8G ED lenses only.
4 Available when camera is used to select flash mode.
AThe AS-15 Sync Terminal Adapter
When the AS-15 sync terminal adapter (available separately) is
mounted on the camera accessory shoe, flash accessories can be
connected via a sync cable.
DUse Only Nikon Flash Accessories
Use only Nikon flash units.
Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V
applied to the accessory shoe could not only prevent normal
operation, but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash.
Before
using a Nikon flash unit not listed in this section, contact a Nikon-
authorized service representative for more information.
328 Technical Notes
DNotes on Optional Flash Units
Refer to the Speedlight manual for detailed instructions.
If the flash
unit supports CLS, refer to the section on CLS-compatible digital SLR
cameras.
The D5500 is not included in the “digital SLR” category in the
SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX manuals.
If an optional flash unit is attached in shooting modes other than j, %,
and 3, the flash will fire with every shot, even in modes in which the
built-in flash can not be used.
i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and
12800.
At high ISO sensitivities, noise (lines) may appear in photos
taken with some optional flash units; if this occurs, choose a lower
value.
At values over 12800, the desired results may not be achieved at
some ranges or aperture settings.
If the flash-ready indicator flashes
for about three seconds after a photograph is taken, the flash has fired
at full power and the photograph may be underexposed (CLS-
compatible flash units only; for information on the exposure and flash
charge indicators on other units, see the manual provided with the
flash).
When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash
photography, correct exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode.
We recommend that you choose spot metering to select standard
i-TTL flash control.
Take a test shot and view the results in the monitor.
In i-TTL, use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash
unit.
Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels, as this may
produce incorrect exposure.
If the controls on the optional SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700 or
SB-600 flash unit or SU-800 wireless Speedlight commander are used
to set flash compensation, Y will appear in the information display.
329Technical Notes
The SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-500, and SB-400
provide red-eye reduction, while the SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700,
SB-600, and SU-800 provide AF-assist illumination with the following
restrictions:
•SB-910 and SB-900: AF-assist
illumination is available with
17–135 mm AF lenses, however,
autofocus is available only with the
focus points shown at right.
•SB-800, SB-600, and SU-800: AF-assist
illumination is available with
24–105 mm AF lenses, however,
autofocus is available only with the
focus points shown at right.
•SB-700: AF-assist illumination is
available with 24–135 mm AF
lenses, however, autofocus is
available only with the focus points
shown at right.
Depending on the lens used and scene recorded, the in-focus indicator
(I) may be displayed when the subject is not in focus, or the camera
may be unable to focus and the shutter release will be disabled.
17–19 mm
20–105 mm
106–135 mm
24–34 mm
35–49 mm
50–105 mm
24–135 mm
330 Technical Notes
At the time of writing, the following accessories were available
for the D5500.
Other Accessories
Power sources •Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14a (027): Additional
EN-EL14a batteries are available from local retailers and
Nikon-authorized service representatives. EN-EL14
batteries can also be used.
•Battery Charger MH-24 (027): Recharge EN-EL14a and
EN-EL14 batteries.
•Power Connector EP-5A, AC Adapter EH-5b: These accessories
can be used to power the camera for extended periods
(EH-5a and EH-5 AC adapters can also be used).
A power
connector EP-5A is required to connect the camera to
the EH-5b, EH-5a, or EH-5; see page 335 for details.
Accessory shoe
covers
Accessory Shoe Cover BS-1: A cover protecting the accessory
shoe. The accessory shoe is used for optional flash units.
Filters •Filters intended for special-effects photography may
interfere with autofocus or the electronic rangefinder.
•The D5500 can not be used with linear polarizing filters.
Use C-PL or C-PL II circular polarizing filters instead.
•NC filters are recommended for protecting the lens.
•To prevent ghosting, use of a filter is not recommended
when the subject is framed against a bright light, or
when a bright light source is in the frame.
•Center-weighted metering is recommended with filters
with exposure factors (filter factors) over 1× (Y44, Y48,
Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL, ND2S, ND4, ND4S, ND8,
ND8S, ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12).
See the filter
manual for details.
331Technical Notes
Viewfinder
eyepiece
accessories
•DK-5 Eyepiece Cap (076): Prevents light entering via the
viewfinder from appearing in the photograph or
interfering with exposure.
•DK-20C Eyepiece Correction Lenses: Lenses are available with
diopters of –5, –4, –3, –2, 0, +0.5, +1, +2, and +3 m–1
when the camera diopter adjustment control is in the
neutral position (–1 m–1).
Use eyepiece correction
lenses only if the desired focus can not be achieved with
the built in diopter adjustment control (–1.7 to
+0.5 m–1).
Test eyepiece correction lenses before
purchase to ensure that the desired focus can be
achieved.
The rubber eyecup can not be used with
eyepiece correction lenses.
•Magnifier DG-2: The DG-2 magnifies the scene displayed in
the center of the viewfinder for greater precision during
focusing.
Eyepiece adapter required (available
separately).
Note that because the DG-2 interferes with
the eye sensor, you may find it necessary to select Off
for the Info display auto off item in the setup menu
(0278) when this accessory is attached.
•Eyepiece Adapter DK-22: The DK-22 is used when attaching
the DG-2 magnifier.
The monitor can not be rotated
with the adapter in place.
•Right-Angle Viewing Attachment DR-6: The DR-6 attaches at a
right angle to the viewfinder eyepiece, allowing the
image in the viewfinder to be viewed at right angles to
the lens (for example, from directly above when the
camera is horizontal).
The monitor can not be rotated
with the attachment in place.
In addition, because the
DR-6 interferes with the eye sensor, you may find it
necessary to select Off for the Info display auto off
item in the setup menu when this accessory is attached.
332 Technical Notes
Software Camera Control Pro 2: Control the camera remotely from a
computer to record movies and photographs and save
photographs directly to the computer hard disk.
Note: Use the latest versions of Nikon software; see the
websites listed on page xix for the latest information on
supported operating systems. At default settings, Nikon
Message Center 2 will periodically check for updates to
Nikon software and firmware while you are logged in to
an account on the computer and the computer is
connected to the Internet.
A message is automatically
displayed when an update is found.
Body cap Body Cap BF-1B/Body Cap BF-1A: The body cap keeps the
mirror, viewfinder screen, and image sensor free of dust
when a lens is not in place.
Remote
controls/
wireless
remote
controller
•Wireless Remote Control ML-L3 (0107): The ML-L3 uses a 3 V
CR2025 battery.
Pressing the battery-chamber latch to the right (q),
insert a fingernail into the gap and open the battery
chamber (w).
Ensure that the battery is inserted in the
correct orientation (r).
•Wireless Remote Controller WR-R10/WR-T10: When a WR-R10
wireless remote controller is attached, the camera can
be controlled wirelessly using a WR-T10 wireless remote
controller (0109, 282).
•Wireless Remote Controller WR-1 (0109, 282): The WR-1 can
function as either a transmitter or a receiver and is used
in combination either with another WR-1 or a WR-R10 or
WR-T10 wireless remote controller. For example, a WR-1
can be connected to the accessory terminal for use as a
receiver, allowing the shutter to be released remotely by
another WR-1 acting as a transmitter.
333Technical Notes
Microphones Stereo Microphone ME-1 (0180)
Accessory
terminal
accessories
The D5500 is equipped with
an accessory terminal for
WR-1 and WR-R10 wireless
remote controllers (0109),
MC-DC2 remote cords (0121),
and GP-1/GP-1A GPS units
(0283), which connect
with the H mark on the connector aligned with the F
next to the accessory terminal (close the connector cover
when the terminal is not in use).
USB and A/V
connector
accessories
•UC-E23 and UC-E6 USB cables (0211, 214): The supplied
UC-E23 cable is not available for separate purchase;
purchase UC-E6 cables instead.
•EG-CP16 audio/video cables
HDMI cables
(0222)
HDMI Cable HC-E1: An HDMI cable with a type C connector
for connection to the camera and a type A connector for
connection to HDMI devices.
AOptional Accessories
Availability may vary with country or region. See our website or
brochures for the latest information.
334 Technical Notes
Approved Memory Cards
The following SD memory cards have been tested and approved
for use in the camera.
Cards with class 6 or faster write speeds
are recommended for movie recording.
Recording may end
unexpectedly when cards with slower write speeds are used.
Other cards have not been tested.
For more details on the above
cards, please contact the manufacturer.
SD memory
cards SDHC memory cards 2SDXC memory
cards 3
SanDisk 2GB1
4GB, 8GB, 16GB, 32GB 64 GB, 128 GB
Toshiba —64GB
Panasonic 2GB1
4GB, 6GB, 8GB, 12GB,
16 GB, 24 GB, 32 GB 48 GB, 64 GB
Lexar Media 4GB, 8GB, 16GB, 32GB —
Platinum II
—8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB
64 GB
Professional 64 GB, 128 GB,
256 GB
Full-HD Video 4GB, 8GB, 16GB —
1 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used support 2 GB
cards.
2 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used are SDHC-
compliant.
The camera supports UHS-I.
3 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card
will be used are SDXC-compliant.
The camera supports UHS-I.
335Technical Notes
Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter
Turn the camera off before attaching an optional power
connector and AC adapter.
1Ready the camera.
Open the battery-chamber
(q) and power connector
(w) covers.
2Insert the EP-5A power connector.
Be sure to insert the connector in the
orientation shown, using the
connector to keep the orange battery
latch pressed to one side.
Be sure the
connector is fully inserted.
3Close the battery-chamber cover.
Position the power
connector cable so that it
passes through the power
connector slot and close
the battery-chamber cover.
336 Technical Notes
4Connect the EH-5b AC adapter.
Connect the AC adapter power cable to the AC socket on AC
adapter (e) and the power cable to the DC socket (r).
A P
icon is displayed in the monitor when the camera is powered
by the AC adapter and power connector.
337Technical Notes
Storage
When the camera will not be used for an extended period,
remove the battery and store it in a cool, dry area with the
terminal cover in place.
To prevent mold or mildew, store the
camera in a dry, well-ventilated area.
Do not store your camera
with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locations that:
•are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%
•are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic
fields, such as televisions or radios
•are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below
–10 °C (14 °F)
Cleaning
Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.
Caring for the Camera
Camera body
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently
with a soft, dry cloth.
After using the camera at the beach
or seaside, wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly
dampened in distilled water and dry thoroughly.
Important:
Dust or other foreign matter inside the camera may cause
damage not covered under warranty.
Lens, mirror,
and
viewfinder
These glass elements are easily damaged.
Remove dust
and lint with a blower.
If using an aerosol blower, keep the
can vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid.
To remove
fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens
cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with care.
Monitor
Remove dust and lint with a blower.
When removing
fingerprints and other stains, wipe the surface lightly with
a soft cloth or chamois leather.
Do not apply pressure, as
this could result in damage or malfunction.
338 Technical Notes
Image Sensor Cleaning
If you suspect that dirt or dust on the image sensor is appearing
in photographs, you can clean the sensor using the Clean image
sensor option in the setup menu.
The sensor can be cleaned at
any time using the Clean now option, or cleaning can be
performed automatically when the camera is turned on or off.
❚❚ “Clean Now”
Holding the camera base down, select
Clean image sensor in the setup menu,
then highlight Clean now and press J.
The camera will check the image sensor
and then begin cleaning.
1 flashes in
the viewfinder and other operations can
not be performed while cleaning is in
progress.
Do not remove or disconnect
the power source until cleaning ends and
the setup menu is displayed.
339Technical Notes
❚❚ “Clean at Startup/Shutdown”
1Select Clean at startup/shutdown.
Select Clean image sensor, then
highlight Clean at startup/
shutdown and press 2.
2Select an option.
Highlight an option and press J.
Choose from Clean at startup, Clean
at shutdown, Clean at startup &
shutdown, and Cleaning off.
DImage Sensor Cleaning
Using camera controls during startup interrupts image sensor
cleaning.
Cleaning is performed by vibrating the image sensor.
If dust can not
be fully removed using the options in the Clean image sensor menu,
clean the image sensor manually (0340) or consult a Nikon-
authorized service representative.
If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession,
image sensor cleaning may be temporarily disabled to protect the
camera’s internal circuitry.
Cleaning can be performed again after a
short wait.
340 Technical Notes
❚❚ Manual Cleaning
If foreign matter can not be removed from the image sensor
using the Clean image sensor option in the setup menu
(0338), the sensor can be cleaned manually as described
below.
Note, however, that the sensor is extremely delicate and
easily damaged.
Nikon recommends that the sensor be cleaned
only by Nikon-authorized service personnel.
1Charge the battery.
A reliable power source is required when inspecting or
cleaning the image sensor.
Be sure the battery is fully
charged before proceeding.
2Remove the lens.
Turn the camera off and remove the lens.
3Select Lock mirror up for cleaning.
Turn the camera on and highlight
Lock mirror up for cleaning in the
setup menu and press 2 (note that
this option is not available at battery
levels of H or below).
4Press J.
The message shown at right will be
displayed in the monitor.
5Raise the mirror.
Press the shutter-release button all
the way down.
The mirror will be
raised and the shutter curtain will
open, revealing the image sensor.
341Technical Notes
6Examine the image sensor.
Holding the camera so that light falls
on the image sensor, examine the
interior of the camera for dust or lint.
If no foreign objects are present,
proceed to Step 8.
7Clean the sensor.
Remove any dust and lint from the
sensor with a blower.
Do not use a
blower-brush, as the bristles could
damage the sensor.
Dirt that can not
be removed with a blower can only be
removed by Nikon-authorized service
personnel.
Under no circumstances should you touch or
wipe the sensor.
8Turn the camera off.
The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter
curtain will close.
Replace the lens or body cap.
AUse a Reliable Power Source
The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged.
If the camera
powers off while the mirror is raised, the curtain will close
automatically.
To prevent damage to the curtain, observe the
following precautions:
•Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source
while the mirror is raised.
•If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised, a beep will sound
and the self-timer lamp will flash to warn that the shutter curtain will
close and the mirror will be lowered after about two minutes.
End
cleaning or inspection immediately.
342 Technical Notes
DForeign Matter on the Image Sensor
Foreign matter entering the camera when lenses or body caps are
removed or exchanged (or in rare circumstances lubricant or fine
particles from the camera itself) may adhere to the image sensor,
where it may appear in photographs taken under certain conditions.
To protect the camera when no lens is in place, be sure to replace the
body cap provided with the camera, being careful to first remove all
dust and other foreign matter that may be adhering to the camera
mount, lens mount, and body cap.
Avoid attaching the body cap or
exchanging lenses in dusty environments.
Should foreign matter find its way onto the image sensor, use the
image sensor cleaning option as described on page 338.
If the
problem persists, clean the sensor manually (0340) or have the
sensor cleaned by authorized Nikon service personnel.
Photographs
affected by the presence of foreign matter on the sensor can be
retouched using the clean image options available in some imaging
applications.
DServicing the Camera and Accessories
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing.
Nikon
recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or
Nikon-authorized service representative once every one to two years,
and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees
apply to these services).
Frequent inspection and servicing are
particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally.
Any
accessories regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional
flash units, should be included when the camera is inspected or
serviced.
343Technical Notes
Do not drop: The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or
vibration.
Keep dry: This product is not waterproof, and may malfunction if
immersed in water or exposed to high levels of humidity.
Rusting of the
internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage.
Avoid sudden changes in temperature: Sudden changes in temperature, such
as those that occur when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold
day, can cause condensation inside the device.
To prevent
condensation, place the device in a carrying case or plastic bag before
exposing it to sudden changes in temperature.
Keep away from strong magnetic fields: Do not use or store this device in the
vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation
or magnetic fields.
Strong static charges or the magnetic fields
produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with
the monitor, damage data stored on the memory card, or affect the
product’s internal circuitry.
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun: Do not leave the lens pointed at the
sun or other strong light source for an extended period.
Intense light
may cause the image sensor to deteriorate or produce a white blur effect
in photographs.
Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source: Do not
unplug the product or remove the battery while the product is on or
while images are being recorded or deleted.
Forcibly cutting power in
these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product
memory or internal circuitry.
To prevent an accidental interruption of
power, avoid carrying the product from one location to another while
the AC adapter is connected.
Caring for the Camera and Battery:
Cautions
344 Technical Notes
Cleaning: When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to gently remove
dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth.
After using the
camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth
lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly.
The lens and mirror are easily damaged.
Dust and lint should be gently
removed with a blower.
When using an aerosol blower, keep the can
vertical to prevent discharge of liquid.
To remove fingerprints and other
stains from the lens, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth
and wipe the lens carefully.
See “Image Sensor Cleaning” (0338, 340) for information on cleaning
the image sensor.
Do not touch the shutter curtain: The shutter curtain is extremely thin and
easily damaged.
Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on
the curtain, poke it with cleaning tools, or subject it to powerful air
currents from a blower.
These actions could scratch, deform, or tear the
curtain.
Storage: To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-
ventilated area.
If you are using an AC adapter, unplug the adapter to
prevent fire.
If the product will not be used for an extended period,
remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera in a plastic
bag containing a desiccant.
Do not, however, store the camera case in a
plastic bag, as this may cause the material to deteriorate.
Note that
desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be
replaced at regular intervals.
To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once
a month.
Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before
putting it away.
Store the battery in a cool, dry place.
Replace the terminal cover before
putting the battery away.
345Technical Notes
Notes on the monitor: The monitor is constructed with extremely high
precision; at least 99.99% of pixels are effective, with no more than 0.01%
being missing or defective.
Hence while these displays may contain
pixels that are always lit (white, red, blue, or green) or always off (black),
this is not a malfunction and has no effect on images recorded with the
device.
Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light.
Do not apply pressure to the monitor, as this could cause damage or
malfunction.
Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a blower.
Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a soft cloth or chamois
leather.
Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury
from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor
touching the skin or entering the eyes and mouth.
Moiré: Moiré is an interference pattern created by the interaction of an
image containing a regular, repeating grid, such as the pattern of weave
in cloth or windows in a building, with the camera image sensor grid.
If
you notice moiré in your photographs, try changing the distance to the
subject, zooming in and out, or changing the angle between the subject
and the camera.
The battery and charger: Batteries may leak or explode if improperly
handled.
Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages xi–xiv of this
manual.
Observe the following precautions when handling batteries:
•Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment.
•Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat.
•Keep the battery terminals clean.
•Turn the product off before replacing the battery.
•Remove the battery from the camera or charger when not in use and
replace the terminal cover.
These devices draw minute amounts of
charge even when off and could draw the battery down to the point
that it will no longer function.
If the battery will not be used for some
time, insert it in the camera and run it flat before removing it and
storing it in a location with an ambient temperature of 15 °C to 25 °C
(59 °F to 77 °F; avoid hot or extremely cold locations).
Repeat this
process at least once every six months.
346 Technical Notes
•Turning the camera on and off repeatedly when the battery is fully
discharged will shorten battery life.
Batteries that have been fully
discharged must be charged before use.
•The internal temperature of the battery may rise while the battery is in
use.
Attempting to charge the battery while the internal temperature
is elevated will impair battery performance, and the battery may not
charge or charge only partially.
Wait for the battery to cool before
charging.
•Charge the battery indoors at ambient temperatures of 5 °C–35 °C
(41 °F–95 °F).
Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below
0 °C (32 °F) or above 40 °C (104 °F); failure to observe this precaution
could damage the battery or impair its performance.
Capacity may be
reduced and charging times may increase at battery temperatures
from 0 °C (32 °F) to 15 °C (59 °F) and from 45 °C (113 °F) to 60 °C (140 °F).
The battery will not charge if its temperature is below 0 °C (32 °F) or
above 60 °C (140 °F).
•If the CHARGE lamp flashes quickly (about eight times a second) during
charging, confirm that the temperature is in the correct range and then
unplug the charger and remove and reinsert the battery.
If the
problem persists, cease use immediately and take battery and charger
to your retailer or a Nikon-authorized service representative.
• Do not move the charger or touch the battery during charging. Failure
to observe this precaution could in very rare instances result in the
charger showing that charging is complete when the battery is only
partially charged. Remove and reinsert the battery to begin charging
again.
•Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair
battery performance.
•A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge
when used at room temperature indicates that it requires replacement.
Purchase a new EN-EL14a battery.
•Use the charger with compatible batteries only. Unplug when not in
use.
347Technical Notes
•Charge the battery before use.
When taking photographs on
important occasions, ready a spare battery and keep it fully charged.
Depending on your location, it may be difficult to purchase
replacement batteries on short notice.
Note that on cold days, the
capacity of batteries tends to decrease.
Be sure the battery is fully
charged before taking photographs outside in cold weather.
Keep a
spare battery in a warm place and exchange the two as necessary.
Once warmed, a cold battery may recover some of its charge.
•Used batteries are a valuable resource; recycle in accord with local
regulations.
348 Technical Notes
The following table lists the settings that can be adjusted in each
mode.
Note that some settings may be unavailable depending
on the options selected.
Available Settings
i j
P, S ,
A, M
k,
p,
n,
o,
s,
w,
0
l,
m,
r,
t,
u,
v,
x,
y,
z%
S,
TU ' ( 3
1,
2,
3
Shooting menu
ISO sensitivity ——z
z
1
z
1—
z
1
z
1
z
1
z
1
z
1
z
1
White balance ——z—————————
Set Picture Control ——z—————————
Active D-Lighting —2—2z—2—2———
2————
HDR (high dynamic
range) ——z—————————
Long exposure NR zzzzz—zzzzzz
High ISO NR zzzzz—zzzzzz
Other settings
Focus mode
(viewfinder) zzzzz—zzzzzz
AF-area mode
(viewfinder) zzzzz—zzz—zz
Focus mode (live
view/movie) zzzzzzzzzzzz
AF-area mode (live
view/movie) ——zzz
z
3z
z
3
z
3—
z
3z
349Technical Notes
1Auto ISO sensitivity control is not available.
2Fixed at Auto.
3 Subject-tracking AF is not available.
4Not available in 0 mode.
5Not available in w mode.
6Available only in x, y, and z modes.
Other settings
Metering ——z—————————
Bracketing ——z—————————
Flash compensation ——zzz———————
Exposure
compensation ——zzzz——————
Flash mode z—z
z
4——zzz———
Custom setting menu
a3: Built-in AF-assist
illuminator zzz
z
5
z
6—zzz—zz
e1: Flash cntrl for
built-in flash/
Optional flash
——z—————————
e2: Auto bracketing
set ——z—————————
i j
P, S ,
A, M
k,
p,
n,
o,
s,
w,
0
l,
m,
r,
t,
u,
v,
x,
y,
z%
S,
TU ' ( 3
1,
2,
3
350 Technical Notes
If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of
common problems below before consulting your retailer or
Nikon-authorized service representative.
Battery/Display
Troubleshooting
The camera is on but does not respond: Wait for recording to end.
If the
problem persists, turn the camera off.
If the camera does not turn off,
remove and reinsert the battery or, if you are using an AC adapter,
disconnect and reconnect the AC adapter.
Note that although any data
currently being recorded will be lost, data that have already been
recorded will not be affected by removing or disconnecting the power
source.
Viewfinder is out of focus: Adjust viewfinder focus (033).
If this does not
correct the problem, select single-servo autofocus (AF-S; 078), single-
point AF (c; 082), and the center focus point, and then frame a high-
contrast subject in the center focus point and press the shutter-release
button halfway to focus the camera.
With the camera in focus, use the
diopter adjustment control to bring the subject into clear focus in the
viewfinder.
If necessary, viewfinder focus can be further adjusted using
optional corrective lenses (0331).
Viewfinder is dark: Insert a fully-charged battery (027, 28).
Displays turn off without warning: Choose longer delays for Custom Setting
c2 (Auto off timers; 0253).
Information display does not appear in monitor: Shutter-release button is
pressed halfway or eye sensor has turned display off.
If information
display does not appear when you remove your finger from shutter-
release button or uncover eye sensor, confirm that On is selected for
Auto info display (0278) and that battery is charged (027).
Viewfinder display is unresponsive and dim: The response times and brightness
of this display vary with temperature.
351Technical Notes
Shooting (All Modes)
Fine lines are visible around active focus point or display turns red when focus point is
highlighted: These phenomena are normal for this type of viewfinder and
do not indicate a malfunction.
Camera takes time to turn on: Delete files or folders.
Shutter-release disabled:
•Memory card is locked, full, or not inserted (028, 35).
•Release locked is selected for Slot empty release lock (0281) and no
memory card is inserted (028).
•Built-in flash is charging (044).
•Camera is not in focus (040).
•CPU lens with aperture ring attached but aperture not locked at
highest f-number (0315).
•Non-CPU lens is attached but camera is not in mode M (0316).
Only one shot taken each time shutter-release button is pressed in continuous shooting
mode: Continuous shooting is not available if built-in flash fires (073,
93).
Final photo is larger than area shown in viewfinder: Viewfinder horizontal and
vertical frame coverage is approximately 95%.
Photos are out of focus:
•AF-S, AF-P, or AF-I lens is not attached: use AF-S, AF-P, or AF-I lens or
focus manually.
•Camera unable to focus using autofocus: use manual focus or focus
lock (080, 86, 88).
•Camera is in manual focus mode: focus manually (088).
Focus does not lock when shutter-release button is pressed halfway: Use A (L)
button to lock focus when live view is off and AF-C is selected for focus
mode or when photographing moving subjects in AF-A mode (086).
352 Technical Notes
Can not select focus point:
•e(Auto-area AF; 083) is selected: choose another AF-area mode.
•Press shutter-release button halfway to start standby timer (044).
Can not select AF-area mode: Manual focus selected (078, 164).
AF-assist illuminator does not light:
•AF-assist illuminator does not light if AF-C is selected for autofocus
mode (078) or if continuous-servo autofocus is selected when the
camera is in AF-A mode.
Choose AF-S. If an option other than
e(Auto-area AF) is selected for AF-area mode, select center focus
point (082, 85).
•The camera is currently in live view or a movie is being recorded.
•Off is selected for Custom Setting a3 (Built-in AF-assist illuminator,
0250).
•Illuminator has turned off automatically.
Illuminator may become hot
with continued use; wait for it to cool down.
Image size can not be changed: Image quality set to NEF (RAW) (091).
Camera is slow to record photos:
•Depending on shooting conditions and memory card performance,
memory card access lamp may light for up to about a minute after
shooting ends in continuous release modes.
•Turn long exposure noise reduction off (0243).
Randomly-spaced bright pixels appear in photos:
•Choose lower ISO sensitivity or turn high ISO noise reduction on
(0244).
•Turn Active D-Lighting off to avoid heightening the effects of noise
(0134).
353Technical Notes
No photo taken when remote control shutter-release button is pressed:
•Replace battery in remote control (0332).
•Choose remote control release mode (0107).
•Flash is charging (0109).
•Time selected for Custom Setting c4 (Remote on duration (ML-L3),
0254) has elapsed.
•Bright light is interfering with ML-L3 remote control.
Can not choose a release mode: Release mode selection is not available when
the monitor is off (071).
Note that the eye sensor may turn the monitor
off automatically when you put your eye to the viewfinder.
Beep does not sound:
•Off is selected for Beep options > Beep on/off (0276).
•Camera is in quiet shutter-release mode (074), or movie is being
recorded (0174).
•MF or AF-C is selected as the focus mode or subject moves when AF-A is
selected (078).
Smudges appear in photographs: Clean front and rear lens elements.
If
problem persists, perform image sensor cleaning (0338).
Date is not imprinted on photos: An NEF (RAW) option is selected for image
quality (091, 256).
Sound is not recorded with movies: Microphone off is selected for Movie
settings > Microphone (0178).
Live view ends unexpectedly or does not start: Live view may end automatically
to prevent damage to the camera’s internal circuits if:
•The ambient temperature is high
•The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to
record movies
•The camera has been used in continuous release modes for extended
periods
If live view or movie recording does not start when you attempt to start
live view, wait for the internal circuits to cool and then try again.
Note
that the camera may feel warm to the touch, but this does not indicate a
malfunction.
354 Technical Notes
Shooting (P, S, A, M)
Image artifacts appear during live view: The temperature of the camera’s
internal circuits may rise during live view, causing image “noise” in the
form of bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog.
Exit live view
when the camera is not in use.
Flicker or banding appears during live view or movie recording: Choose an option
for Flicker reduction that matches the frequency of the local AC power
supply (0281).
Bright bands appear during live view or movie recording: A flashing sign, flash, or
other light source with brief duration was used during live view or movie
recording.
Menu item can not be selected: Some options are not available in all modes.
Shutter-release disabled:
•Non-CPU lens is attached: rotate camera mode dial to M (0316).
•Mode dial rotated to S after shutter speed of “Bulb” or “Time” selected
in mode M: choose new shutter speed (0117).
•If white-balance bracketing is active, shutter release will be disabled
and viewfinder exposure-count display will flash if there is insufficient
space on memory card to record all images in bracketing sequence.
Insert new memory card.
Full range of shutter speeds not available:
•Flash in use (098).
•When On is selected for Movie settings > Manual movie settings in
the shooting menu, the range of available shutter speed varies with the
frame rate (0179).
Can not select desired aperture: Range of available apertures varies with lens
used.
Colors are unnatural:
•Adjust white balance to match light source (0137).
•Adjust Set Picture Control settings (0152).
355Technical Notes
Playback
Can not measure white balance: Subject is too dark or too bright (0144).
Image can not be selected as source for preset white balance: Image was not
created with D5500 (0146).
White balance bracketing unavailable: NEF (RAW) or NEF+JPEG image quality
option selected for image quality (090).
Effects of Picture Control differ from image to image: A (auto) is selected for
sharpening, clarity, contrast, or saturation.
For consistent results over a
series of photos, choose another setting (0156).
Metering can not be changed: Autoexposure lock is in effect (0127).
Exposure compensation can not be used: Camera is in mode M.
Choose another
mode (0113, 129).
Noise (reddish areas or other artifacts) appears in long time-exposures: Enable long
exposure noise reduction (0243).
NEF (RAW) image is not played back: Photo was taken at image quality of NEF
(RAW)+JPEG (090).
Can not view pictures recorded with other cameras: Pictures recorded with other
makes of camera may not be displayed correctly.
Some pictures are not displayed during playback: Select All for Playback folder
(0234).
“Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation:
•Select On for Rotate tall (0235).
•Photo was taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation (0235).
•Photo is displayed in image review (0234).
•Camera was pointed up or down when photo was taken (0235).
Can not delete picture:
•Picture is protected: remove protection (0202).
•Memory card is locked (035).
356 Technical Notes
Can not retouch picture: Photo can not be further edited with this camera
(0287).
Can not change print order:
•Memory card is full: delete pictures (049, 205).
•Memory card is locked (035).
Can not select photo for printing: Photo is in NEF (RAW) format.
Create JPEG
copy using NEF (RAW) processing or transfer to computer and print
using ViewNX 2 or Capture NX-D (0210).
Picture is not displayed on TV:
•Choose correct video mode (0281) or output resolution (0223).
•A/V (0220) or HDMI (0222) cable is not correctly connected.
Camera does not respond to remote control for HDMI-CEC television:
•Select On for HDMI > Device control in the setup menu (0223).
•Adjust HDMI-CEC settings for the television as described in
documentation provided with the device.
Can not transfer photos to computer: OS not compatible with camera or
transfer software.
Use card reader to copy photos to computer.
Image Dust Off option in Capture NX-D does not have desired effect: Image sensor
cleaning changes the position of dust on the image sensor.
Image Dust
Off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed
can not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is
performed.
Image Dust Off reference data recorded after image sensor
cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken before
image sensor cleaning is performed (0279).
Computer displays NEF (RAW) images differently from camera: Third-party
software does not display effects of Picture Controls, Active D-Lighting,
or vignette control.
Use ViewNX 2 or Capture NX-D (0210).
357Technical Notes
Wi-Fi (Wireless Networks)
Miscellaneous
Smart devices do not display the camera SSID (network name):
•Confirm that Enable is selected for Wi-Fi > Network connection in the
camera setup menu (0229).
•Try turning the smart device Wi-Fi off and then on again.
Date of recording is not correct: Set camera clock (032, 275).
Menu item can not be selected: Some options are not available at certain
combinations of settings or when no memory card is inserted (028,
286, 348).
358 Technical Notes
This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear
in the viewfinder and monitor.
Error Messages
AWarning Icons
A flashing d in the monitor or s in the viewfinder indicates that a
warning or error message can be displayed in the monitor by pressing
the W (Q) button.
Indicator
Solution 0Monitor Viewfinder
Lock lens aperture ring
at minimum aperture
(largest f/-number).
B
(flashes)
Set lens aperture ring to
minimum aperture (highest
f-number).
315
Lens not attached F/s
(flashes)
•Attach non-IX NIKKOR lens. 315
•If non-CPU lens is attached,
select mode M.
119
Before taking photos,
rotate the zoom ring
to extend the lens.
F
(flashes)
A lens with a retractable lens
barrel button is attached with
the lens barrel retracted. Press
the retractable lens barrel
button and rotate the zoom
ring to extend the lens.
30
Shutter release
disabled. Recharge
battery.
d/s
(flashes)
Turn camera off and recharge
or replace battery. 27, 31
This battery cannot be
used. Choose battery
designated for use in
this camera.
d
(flashes) Use Nikon-approved battery. 330
Initialization error.
Turn camera off and
then on again.
d/k
(flashes)
Turn camera off, remove and
replace battery, and then turn
camera on again.
28, 31
359Technical Notes
Battery level is low.
Complete operation
and turn camera off
immediately.
—
End cleaning and turn camera
off and recharge or replace
battery.
341
Clock not set —Set camera clock. 32,
275
No memory card
inserted
S/s
(flashes)
Turn camera off and confirm
that card is correctly inserted. 28
Memory card is locked.
Slide lock to “write”
position.
(
(flashes)
Memory card is locked (write
protected).
Slide card write-
protect switch to “write”
position.
35
This memory card
cannot be used. Card
may be damaged.
Insert another card.
(/k
(flashes)
•Use approved card. 334
•Format card.
If problem
persists, card may be
damaged.
Contact Nikon-
authorized service
representative.
272
•Error creating new folder.
Delete files or insert new
memory card.
28,
205
•Insert new memory card. 28
•Eye-Fi card is still emitting
wireless signal after Disable
has been selected for Eye-Fi
upload.
To terminate
wireless transmission, turn
the camera off and remove
the card.
284
Indicator
Solution 0Monitor Viewfinder
360 Technical Notes
Not available if Eye-Fi
card is locked.
(/k
(flashes)
Eye-Fi card is locked (write
protected).
Slide card write-
protect switch to “write”
position.
35
This card is not
formatted.
Format the card.
T
(flashes)
Format card or turn camera
off and insert new memory
card.
28,
272
Card is full j/A/s
(flashes)
•Reduce quality or size. 90
•Delete photographs. 205
•Insert new memory card. 28
—●
(flashes)
Camera can not focus using
autofocus.
Change
composition or focus
manually.
40, 80,
88
Subject is too bright
s
(flashes)
•Use a lower ISO sensitivity. 100
•Use commercial ND filter. 330
•In mode:
SIncrease shutter speed 117
AChoose a smaller
aperture (higher
f-number)
118
%Choose another
shooting mode
4, 61
Subject is too dark
•Use a higher ISO sensitivity. 100
•Use flash. 93
•In mode:
SLower shutter speed 117
AChoose a larger aperture
(lower f-number)
118
Indicator
Solution 0Monitor Viewfinder
361Technical Notes
No “Bulb” in S mode A/s
(flashes) Change shutter speed or
select mode M.
117,
119
No “Time” in S mode &/s
(flashes)
No “Bulb” in HDR mode A/s
(flashes) •Change shutter speed.
•Turn HDR off.
120,
121
135
No “Time” in HDR
mode
&/s
(flashes)
Interval timer
shooting —
Menus and playback are not
available while interval timer
photography is in progress. To
pause, press J.
101
—N
(flashes)
Flash has fired at full power.
Check photo in monitor; if
underexposed, adjust
settings and try again.
—
—N/s
(flashes)
•Use the flash. 93
•Change distance to subject,
aperture, flash range, or ISO
sensitivity.
98, 99,
118
•Lens focal length is less than
18 mm: use a longer focal
length.
—
•Optional SB-400 or SB-300
flash unit attached: flash is in
bounce position or focus
distance is very short.
Continue shooting; if
necessary, increase focus
distance to prevent
shadows from appearing in
photograph.
—
Indicator
Solution 0Monitor Viewfinder
362 Technical Notes
Error. Press shutter
release button again.
O
(flashes)
Release shutter.
If error
persists or appears frequently,
consult Nikon-authorized
service representative.
—
Start-up error. Contact
a Nikon-authorized
service
representative.
Consult Nikon-authorized
service representative. —
Metering error
Unable to start live
view.
Please wait for camera
to cool.
—
Wait for the internal circuits to
cool before resuming live
view or movie recording.
353
Folder contains no
images. —
Folder selected for playback
contains no images.
Select
folder containing images
from Playback folder menu
or insert memory card
containing images.
28,
234
Cannot display this
file. —File can not be played back on
camera. —
Cannot select this file. —Images created with other
devices can not be retouched. 288
This movie cannot be
edited. —
•Movies created with other
devices can not be edited.
288
•Movies must be at least two
seconds long.
185
No image for
retouching. —
Memory card does not
contain NEF (RAW) images for
use with NEF (RAW)
processing.
289
Indicator
Solution 0Monitor Viewfinder
363Technical Notes
Could not connect;
multiple devices
detected. Try again
later.
—
Multiple smart devices are
attempting to connect to
camera simultaneously. Wait
a few minutes before trying
again.
225
Error —
Select Disable for Wi-Fi >
Network connection, then
select Enable again.
230
Network access not
available until camera
cools.
—
Turn camera off and try again
after waiting for camera to
cool.
—
Check printer. —Check printer.
To resume,
select Continue (if available). —*
Check paper. —
Paper is not selected size.
Insert paper of correct size
and select Continue.
—*
Paper jam. —Clear jam and select
Continue.—*
Out of paper. —Insert paper of selected size
and select Continue.—*
Check ink supply. —Check ink.
To resume, select
Continue.—*
Out of ink. —Replace ink and select
Continue.—*
* See printer manual for more information.
Indicator
Solution 0Monitor Viewfinder
364 Technical Notes
❚❚ Nikon D5500 Digital Camera
Specifications
Type
Type Single-lens reflex digital camera
Lens mount Nikon F mount (with AF contacts)
Effective angle of view Nikon DX format; focal length equivalent to
approx. 1.5× that of lenses with FX format angle
of view
Effective pixels
Effective pixels 24.2 million
Image sensor
Image sensor 23.5 × 15.6 mm CMOS sensor
Total pixels 24.78 million
Dust-reduction System Image sensor cleaning, Image Dust Off
reference data (Capture NX-D software
required)
Storage
Image size (pixels) •6000 × 4000 (Large)
•4496 × 3000 (Medium)
•2992 × 2000 (Small)
File format •NEF (RAW): 12- or 14 bit, compressed
•JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine
(approx. 1 : 4), normal (approx. 1 : 8), or basic
(approx. 1 : 16) compression
•NEF (RAW)+JPEG: Single photograph recorded in
both NEF (RAW) and JPEG formats
Picture Control System Standard, Neutral, Vivid, Monochrome, Portrait,
Landscape, Flat; selected Picture Control can be
modified; storage for custom Picture Controls
Media SD (Secure Digital) and UHS-I compliant SDHC
and SDXC memory cards
File system DCF 2.0, DPOF, Exif 2.3, PictBridge
365Technical Notes
Viewfinder
Viewfinder Eye-level pentamirror single-lens reflex
viewfinder
Frame coverage Approx. 95% horizontal and 95% vertical
Magnification Approx. 0.82× (50 mm f/1.4 lens at infinity,
–1.0 m–1)
Eyepoint 17 mm (–1.0 m–1; from center surface of
viewfinder eyepiece lens)
Diopter adjustment –1.7–+0.5 m–1
Focusing screen Type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark VII screen
Reflex mirror Quick return
Lens aperture Instant return, electronically controlled
Lens
Compatible lenses Autofocus is available with AF-S, AF-P, and AF-I
lenses.
Autofocus is not available with other
type G and D lenses, AF lenses (IX NIKKOR and
lenses for the F3AF are not supported), and AI-P
lenses.
Non-CPU lenses can be used in mode M,
but the camera exposure meter will not
function.
The electronic rangefinder can be used with
lenses that have a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or
faster.
Shutter
Type Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal-
plane shutter
Speed 1/4000 – 30 s in steps of 1/3 or 1/2EV; Bulb; Time
Flash sync speed X=1/200 s; synchronizes with shutter at 1/200 s or
slower
366 Technical Notes
Release
Release mode 8 (single frame), !(continuous L),
9(continuous H), J(quiet shutter release),
E(self-timer), "(delayed remote; ML-L3),
#(quick-response remote; ML-L3); interval
timer photography supported
Frame advance rate •!: Up to 3 fps
•9: Up to 5 fps (JPEG and 12-bit NEF/RAW) or
4 fps (14-bit NEF/RAW)
Note: Frame rates assume continuous-servo AF,
manual or shutter-priority auto exposure, a
shutter speed of 1/250 s or faster, Release
selected for Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority
selection), and other settings at default values.
Self-timer 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s; 1–9 exposures
Exposure
Metering mode TTL exposure metering using 2016-pixel RGB
sensor
Metering method •Matrix metering: 3D color matrix metering II
(type G, E, and D lenses); color matrix
metering II (other CPU lenses)
•Center-weighted metering: Weight of 75% given
to 8-mm circle in center of frame
•Spot metering: Meters 3.5-mm circle (about
2.5% of frame) centered on selected focus
point
Range (ISO 100, f/1.4 lens,
20 °C/68 °F)
•Matrix or center-weighted metering: 0–20 EV
•Spot metering: 2–20 EV
Exposure meter coupling CPU
367Technical Notes
Mode Auto modes (iauto; jauto, flash off);
programmed auto with flexible program (P);
shutter-priority auto (S); aperture-priority auto
(A); manual (M); scene modes (kportrait;
llandscape; pchild; msports; nclose up;
onight portrait; rnight landscape; sparty/
indoor; tbeach/snow; usunset; vdusk/
dawn; wpet portrait; xcandlelight; yblossom;
zautumn colors; 0food); special effects modes
(%night vision; S super vivid; T pop; U photo
illustration; ' toy camera effect; (miniature
effect; 3selective color; 1silhouette; 2high
key; 3low key)
Exposure compensation Can be adjusted by –5 – +5 EV in increments of
1/3 or 1/2EV in P, S, A, M, h, and % modes
Exposure bracketing 3 shots in steps of 1/3 or 1/2 EV
White balance bracketing 3 shots in steps of 1
ADL bracketing 2 shots
Exposure lock Luminosity locked at detected value with
A(L) button
ISO sensitivity
(Recommended Exposure
Index)
ISO 100 – 25600 in steps of 1/3 EV.
Auto ISO
sensitivity control available
Active D-Lighting Y Auto, Z Extra high, P High, Q Normal,
R Low, ! Off
Focus
Autofocus Nikon Multi-CAM 4800DX autofocus sensor
module with TTL phase detection, 39 focus
points (including 9 cross-type sensor), and
AF-assist illuminator (range approx. 0.5–3 m/
1ft 8in.–9ft 10in.)
Detection range –1 – +19 EV (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)
Exposure
368 Technical Notes
Lens servo •Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S);
continuous-servo AF (AF-C); auto AF-S/AF-C
selection (AF-A); predictive focus tracking
activated automatically according to subject
status
•Manual focus (MF): Electronic rangefinder can be
used
Focus point Can be selected from 39 or 11 focus points
AF-area mode Single-point AF, 9-, 21-, or 39- point dynamic-
area AF, 3D-tracking, auto-area AF
Focus lock Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release
button halfway (single-servo AF) or by pressing
A (L) button
Flash
Built-in flash i, k, p, n, o, s, w, S, T, U, ' : Auto flash
with auto pop-up
P, S, A, M, 0: Manual pop-up with button release
Guide Number Approx. 12/39, 12/39 with manual flash (m/ft,
ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)
Flash control TTL: i-TTL flash control using 2016-pixel RGB
sensor is available with built-in flash; i-TTL
balanced fill-flash for digital SLR is used with
matrix and center-weighted metering, standard
i-TTL flash for digital SLR with spot metering
Flash mode Auto, auto with red-eye reduction, auto slow
sync, auto slow sync with red-eye reduction, fill-
flash, red-eye reduction, slow sync, slow sync
with red-eye reduction, rear-curtain with slow
sync, rear-curtain sync, off
Flash compensation Can be adjusted by –3 – +1 EV in increments of
1/3 or 1/2 EV in P, S, A, M, and h modes
Flash-ready indicator Lights when built-in flash or optional flash unit
is fully charged; blinks after flash is fired at full
output
Focus
369Technical Notes
Accessory shoe ISO 518 hot-shoe with sync and data contacts
and safety lock
Nikon Creative Lighting
System (CLS)
Advanced Wireless Lighting supported with
SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, or SB-500 as a
master flash or SU-800 as commander; Flash
Color Information Communication supported
with all CLS-compatible flash units
Sync terminal AS-15 sync terminal adapter (available
separately)
White balance
White balance Auto, incandescent, fluorescent (7 types), direct
sunlight, flash, cloudy, shade, preset manual, all
except preset manual with fine-tuning.
Live view
Lens servo •Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S); full-time-
servo AF (AF-F)
•Manual focus (MF)
AF-area mode Face-priority AF, wide-area AF, normal-area AF,
subject-tracking AF
Autofocus Contrast-detect AF anywhere in frame (camera
selects focus point automatically when face-
priority AF or subject-tracking AF is selected)
Automatic scene selection Available in i and j modes
Movie
Metering TTL exposure metering using main image
sensor
Metering method Matrix
Flash
370 Technical Notes
Frame size (pixels) and
frame rate
•1920 × 1080, 60p (progressive)/50p/30p/25p/
24p, ★ high/normal
•1280 × 720, 60p/50p, ★ high/normal
•640 × 424, 30p/25p, ★ high/normal
Frame rates of 30p (actual frame rate 29.97 fps)
and 60p (actual frame rate 59.94 fps) are
available when NTSC is selected for video
mode.
25p and 50p are available when PAL is
selected for video mode.
Actual frame rate
when 24p is selected is 23.976 fps.
File format MOV
Video compression H.264/MPEG-4 Advanced Video Coding
Audio recording format Linear PCM
Audio recording device Built-in or external stereo microphone;
sensitivity adjustable
ISO sensitivity ISO 100–25600
Monitor
Monitor 8.1 cm/3.2-in. (3 : 2), approx. 1037k-dot (720 ×
480 × 3 = 1,036,800 dots), TFT vari-angle LCD
touch screen with 170 ° viewing angle, approx.
100% frame coverage, brightness adjustment,
and eye-sensor controlled on/off
Playback
Playback Full-frame and thumbnail (4, 12, or 80 images or
calendar) playback with playback zoom, movie
playback, photo and/or movie slide shows,
histogram display, highlights, photo
information, location data display, auto image
rotation, picture rating, and image comment
(up to 36 characters)
Movie
371Technical Notes
Interface
USB Hi-Speed USB; connection to built-in USB port
is recommended
Video output NTSC, PAL
HDMI output Type C HDMI connector
Accessory terminal Wireless remote controllers: WR-1, WR-R10
(available separately)
Remote cords: MC-DC2 (available separately)
GPS units: GP-1/GP-1A (available separately)
Audio input Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5 mm diameter);
supports optional ME-1 stereo microphones
Wireless
Standards IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g
Communications protocols •IEEE 802.11b: DSSS/CCK
•IEEE 802.11g: OFDM
Operating frequency 2412–2462 MHz (channels 1–11)
Range (line of sight) Approximately 30 m/98 ft (assumes no
interference; range may vary with signal
strength and presence or absence of obstacles)
Data rate 54 Mbps
Maximum logical data rates according to IEEE
standard.
Actual rates may differ.
Security •Authentication: Open system, WPA2-PSK
•Encryption: AES
Wireless setup Supports WPS
Access protocols Infrastructure
372 Technical Notes
• Unless otherwise stated, all measurements are performed in conformity with Camera and
Imaging Products Association (CIPA) standards or guidelines.
• All figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery.
• Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specifications of the hardware and
software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice.
Nikon will not be held
liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.
Supported languages
Supported languages Arabic, Bengali, Bulgarian, Chinese (Simplified
and Traditional), Czech, Danish, Dutch, English,
Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hindi,
Hungarian, Indonesian, Italian, Japanese,
Korean, Marathi, Norwegian, Persian, Polish,
Portuguese (Portugal and Brazil), Romanian,
Russian, Serbian, Spanish, Swedish, Tamil,
Telugu, Thai, Turkish, Ukrainian, Vietnamese
Power source
Battery One EN-EL14a rechargeable Li-ion battery
AC adapter EH-5b AC adapter; requires EP-5A power
connector (available separately)
Tripod socket
Tripod socket 1/4 in. (ISO 1222)
Dimensions/weight
Dimensions (W × H × D)
Approx. 124 × 97 × 70 mm (4.9 × 3.9 × 2.8 in.)
Weight Approx. 470 g (1 lb 0.6 oz) with battery and
memory card but without body cap; approx.
420 g/14.9 oz (camera body only)
Operating environment
Temperature 0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Humidity 85% or less (no condensation)
373Technical Notes
❚❚ MH-24 Battery Charger
The symbols on this product represent the following:
m AC, p DC, q Class II equipment (The construction of the product is double-insulated.)
❚❚ EN-EL14a Rechargeable Li-ion Battery
Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specifications of the hardware and
software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice.
Nikon will not be held
liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.
Rated input AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz, 0.2 A maximum
Rated output DC 8.4 V/0.9 A
Supported batteries Nikon Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14a
Charging time Approx. 1 hour and 50 minutes at an ambient
temperature of 25 °C (77 °F) when no charge
remains
Operating temperature 0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Dimensions (W×H×D)
Approx. 70 × 26 × 97 mm (2.8 × 1.0 × 3.8 in.),
excluding plug adapter
Weight Approx. 96 g (3.4 oz), excluding plug adapter
Type Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Rated capacity 7.2 V/1230 mAh
Operating temperature 0°C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Dimensions (W×H×D)
Approx. 38 × 53 × 14 mm (1.5 × 2.1 × 0.6 in.)
Weight Approx. 49 g (1.7 oz), excluding terminal cover
374 Technical Notes
❚❚ Supported Standards
•DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File Systems (DCF)
is a standard widely used in the digital camera industry to
ensure compatibility among different makes of camera.
•DPOF: Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is an industry-wide
standard that allows pictures to be printed from print orders
stored on the memory card.
•Exif version 2.3: The camera supports Exif (Exchangeable Image
File Format for Digital Still Cameras) version 2.3, a standard in
which information stored with photographs is used for
optimal color reproduction when the images are output on
Exif-compliant printers.
•PictBridge: A standard developed through cooperation with
the digital camera and printer industries, allowing
photographs to be output directly to a printer without first
transferring them to a computer.
•HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for
multimedia interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV
devices capable of transmitting audiovisual data and control
signals to HDMI-compliant devices via a single cable
connection.
375Technical Notes
ATrademark Information
IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc., in the
United States and/or other countries and is used under license.
Windows is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
PictBridge
logo is a trademark.
The SD, SDHC, and SDXC logos are trademarks of
the SD-3C, LLC.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing,
LLC.
Wi-Fi and the Wi-Fi logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of the
Wi-Fi Alliance.
All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the
other documentation provided with your Nikon product are
trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
AConformity Marking
The standards with which the camera complies can be viewed using
the Conformity marking option in the setup menu (0285).
AFreeType License (FreeType2)
Portions of this software are copyright © 2012 The FreeType Project
(http://www.freetype.org).
All rights reserved.
AMIT License (HarfBuzz)
Portions of this software are copyright © 2014 The HarfBuzz Project
(http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/HarfBuzz).
All rights
reserved.
376 Technical Notes
ACertificates
377Technical Notes
The camera can be purchased as a kit with the lens listed below.
AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR and
AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G
These retractable lenses are for use exclusively with DX format
Nikon digital SLR cameras; SLR film cameras and D4-series, D3-
series, D2-series, D1-series, D800-series, D700, D610, D600,
D300-series, D200, D100, D90, D80, D70-series, D60, D50, D40-
series, D7000, D5100, D5000, D3200, D3100, D3000 digital SLR
cameras are not supported. The parts of the lens are listed
below.
Lens Kits
Focal length scale
Focal length mark
Lens mounting mark
(029)
Rear lens cap
Lens cap
Focus ring (088, 165)
CPU contacts
(0315)
Zoom ring (039)
Retractable lens barrel
button (030)
378 Technical Notes
❚❚ Focus
The focus mode can be selected using camera controls (078).
Autofocus
Focus is adjusted automatically when the camera is in autofocus
mode (078). The focus ring can also be used to focus the
camera if the shutter-release button is kept pressed halfway (or
if the AF-ON button is kept pressed); this is known as “autofocus
with manual override” (M/A). Autofocus will resume when the
shutter-release button is pressed halfway (or the AF-ON button
is pressed) a second time. Note that touching the focus ring
while autofocus is in effect will change the focus position.
Manual Focus
When the camera is in manual focus mode, focus can be
adjusted by rotating the lens focus ring (088). When the
camera is off or the standby timer has expired, the focus ring can
not be used to focus and rotating the zoom ring will change the
focus position; before focusing, turn the camera on or press the
shutter-release button to reactivate the standby timer.
Users of D810-series, Df, D750, D7200, D7100, and D5200
cameras should note that if the standby timer is allowed to
expire, the focus position will change when the timer is
restarted. Refocus before shooting. Longer standby times are
recommended for manual focus and in other situations in which
you may not release the shutter immediately after focusing.
379Technical Notes
❚❚ Using the Built-in Flash
When using the built-in flash, be sure the subject is at a range of
at least 0.6 m (2 ft) and remove lens hoods to prevent vignetting
(shadows created where the end of the lens obscures the built-in
flash).
❚❚ Vibration Reduction (VR, AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR
Only)
When an AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR is mounted
on the camera, vibration reduction can be enabled or disabled
using the Optical VR option in the shooting menu (0245). If On
is selected, vibration reduction will take effect whenever the
shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Vibration reduction
reduces blur caused by camera shake, allowing shutter speeds
up to 4.0 stops slower than would otherwise be the case,
increasing the range of shutter speeds available. The effects of
VR on shutter speed are measured according to Camera and
Imaging Products Association (CIPA) standards; FX-format lenses
are measured using FX-format digital cameras, DX-format lenses
using DX-format cameras. Zoom lenses are measured at
maximum zoom.
Shadow Vignetting
Camera Zoom position
Minimum distance
without vignetting
D5500/D5300/D5200/D3300
18 mm 1.0 m/3 ft 4 in.
24, 35, 45, and
55 mm No vignetting
380 Technical Notes
DVibration Reduction
•When using vibration reduction, press the shutter-release button
halfway and wait for the image in the viewfinder to stabilize before
pressing the shutter-release button the rest of the way down.
•When vibration reduction is active, the image in the viewfinder may
jiggle after the shutter is released. This does not indicate a
malfunction.
•When the camera is panned, vibration reduction applies only to
motion that is not part of the pan (if the camera is panned
horizontally, for example, vibration reduction will be applied only to
vertical shake), making it much easier to pan the camera smoothly in
a wide arc.
•If the camera is equipped with a built-in flash, vibration reduction will
be disabled while the flash charges.
•Vibration reduction is generally recommended when the camera is
mounted on a tripod, although you may prefer to turn it off
depending on shooting conditions and the type of tripod.
381Technical Notes
❚❚ Supplied Accessories
•55 mm snap-on Front Lens Cap LC-55A
•Rear Lens Cap
❚❚ Compatible Accessories
•55 mm screw-on filters
•Rear Lens Cap LF-4
•Lens Case CL-0815
•Bayonet Hood HB-N106
Align the lens hood mounting mark (●) with the lens hood
alignment mark ( ) as shown in Figure q and then rotate
the hood (w) until the ● mark is aligned with the lens hood
lock mark (—).
When attaching or removing the hood, hold it near the symbol
on its base and avoid gripping it too tightly. Vignetting may
occur if the hood is not correctly attached. The hood can be
reversed and mounted on the lens when not in use.
382 Technical Notes
❚❚ Specifications
Type Type G AF-P DX lens with built-in CPU and F
mount
Focal length 18–55 mm
Maximum aperture f/3.5–5.6
Lens construction 12 elements in 9 groups (2 aspherical lens
elements)
Angle of view 76° – 28° 50´
Focal length scale Graduated in millimeters (18, 24, 35, 45, 55)
Distance information Output to camera
Zoom Manual zoom using independent zoom ring
Focusing Autofocus controlled by stepping motor;
separate focus ring for manual focus
Vibration reduction (AF-P
DX NIKKOR 18–55mm
f/3.5–5.6G VR only)
Lens shift using voice coil motors (VCMs)
Minimum focus distance 0.25 m (0.9 ft) from focal plane (089) at all
zoom positions
Diaphragm blades 7 (rounded diaphragm opening)
Diaphragm Fully automatic
Aperture range •18 mm focal length: f/3.5–22
•55 mm focal length: f/5.6–38
The minimum aperture displayed may vary
depending on the size of the exposure
increment selected with the camera.
Metering Full aperture
Filter-attachment size 55 mm (P = 0.75 mm)
Dimensions Approx. 64.5 mm maximum diameter ×
62.5 mm (distance from camera lens mount
flange)
Weight •AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR: Approx.
205 g (7.3 oz)
•AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G: Approx.
195 g (6.9 oz)
383Technical Notes
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II
This retractable lens, for use exclusively with DX format Nikon
digital SLR cameras, is the lens generally used in this manual for
illustrative purposes. The parts of the lens are listed below.
❚❚ Focus
Focus mode is determined by the camera focus mode and the
position of the lens A-M mode switch (078, 88).
Focal length scale
Focal length mark
A-M mode switch (037, 88)
Vibration reduction ON/OFF
switch (0384)
Lens mounting mark
(029)
Rear lens cap
Lens cap
Focus ring (088, 165)
CPU contacts
(0315)
Zoom ring (039)
Retractable lens barrel
button (030)
384 Technical Notes
❚❚ Using the Built-in Flash
When using the built-in flash, be sure the subject is at a range of
at least 0.6 m (2 ft) and remove lens hoods to prevent vignetting
(shadows created where the end of the lens obscures the built-in
flash).
❚❚ Vibration Reduction (VR)
Vibration reduction can be enabled by sliding the
vibration reduction switch to ON and takes effect
whenever the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway. Vibration reduction reduces blur caused
by camera shake, allowing shutter speeds up to 4.0
stops slower than would otherwise be the case (as measured at
55 mm with a DX-format camera according to Camera and
Imaging Products Association [CIPA] standards; effects vary with
the photographer and shooting conditions). This increases the
range of shutter speeds available.
Shadow Vignetting
385Technical Notes
DVibration Reduction
•When using vibration reduction, press the shutter-release button
halfway and wait for the image in the viewfinder to stabilize before
pressing the shutter-release button the rest of the way down.
•When vibration reduction is active, the image in the viewfinder may
jiggle after the shutter is released. This does not indicate a
malfunction.
•When the camera is panned, vibration reduction applies only to
motion that is not part of the pan (if the camera is panned
horizontally, for example, vibration reduction will be applied only to
vertical shake), making it much easier to pan the camera smoothly in
a wide arc.
•Do not turn the camera off or remove the lens while vibration
reduction is in effect.
•If the camera is equipped with a built-in flash, vibration reduction will
be disabled while the flash charges.
•Select OFF when the camera is mounted on a tripod unless the tripod
head is unsecured or the camera is mounted on a monopod, in which
case ON is recommended.
386 Technical Notes
❚❚ Supplied Accessories
•52 mm snap-on Front Lens Cap LC-52
•Rear Lens Cap
❚❚ Compatible Accessories
•52 mm screw-on filters
•Rear Lens Cap LF-4
•Flexible Lens Pouch CL-0815
•Bayonet Hood HB-69
Align the lens hood mounting mark (●) with the lens hood
alignment mark ( ) as shown in Figure q and then rotate
the hood (w) until the ● mark is aligned with the lens hood
lock mark (—).
When attaching or removing the hood, hold it near the
symbol on its base and avoid gripping it too tightly.
Vignetting may occur if the hood is not correctly attached.
The hood can be reversed and mounted on the lens when not
in use.
387Technical Notes
❚❚ Specifications
Type Type G AF-S DX lens with built-in CPU and F
mount
Focal length 18–55 mm
Maximum aperture f/3.5–5.6
Lens construction 11 elements in 8 groups (including 1 aspherical
lens element)
Angle of view 76 °–28 ° 50 ´
Focal length scale Graduated in millimeters (18, 24, 35, 45, 55)
Distance information Output to camera
Zoom Manual zoom using independent zoom ring
Focusing Autofocus controlled by Silent Wave Motor and
separate focus ring for manual focus
Vibration reduction Lens shift using voice coil motors (VCMs)
Minimum focus distance •AF: 0.28 m (0.92 ft) from focal plane (089) at
all zoom positions
•MF: 0.25 m (0.82 ft) from focal plane at all zoom
positions
Diaphragm blades 7 (rounded diaphragm opening)
Diaphragm Fully automatic
Aperture range •18 mm focal length: f/3.5–22
•55 mm focal length: f/5.6–38
The minimum aperture displayed may vary
depending on the size of the exposure
increment selected with the camera.
Metering Full aperture
Filter-attachment size 52 mm (P=0.75 mm)
Dimensions Approx. 66 mm diameter × 59.5 mm (distance
from camera lens mount flange when lens is
retracted)
Weight Approx. 195 g (6.9 oz)
388 Technical Notes
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
This lens is for use exclusively with DX format Nikon digital
camera. The parts of the lens are listed below.
❚❚ Focus
Focus mode is determined by the camera focus mode and the
position of the lens A-M mode switch (078, 88).
AFocusing with AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR Lenses
When single-servo AF (AF-S) is selected as the camera focus mode and
the lens A-M switch is set to A, focus can be adjusted by keeping the
shutter-release button pressed halfway after the autofocus operation
is complete and manually rotating the focus ring.
To refocus using
autofocus, press the shutter-release button halfway again.
Focal length scale
Focal length mark
A-M mode switch (037, 88)
Vibration reduction ON/OFF
switch (0390)
Lens mounting mark
(029)
Rear lens cap
Lens cap
Zoom ring (039)
CPU contacts
(0315)
Focus ring (088, 165)
389Technical Notes
❚❚ Using the Built-in Flash
When using the built-in flash, be sure the subject is at a range of
at least 0.6 m (2 ft) and remove lens hoods to prevent vignetting
(shadows created where the end of the lens obscures the built-in
flash).
Shadow Vignetting
Camera Zoom position
Minimum distance
without vignetting
D7100/D7000/D300 series/
D200/D100
18 mm 1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
24–140 mm No vignetting
D90/D80/D50
18 mm 2.5 m/8 ft 2 in.
24 mm 1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
35–140 mm No vignetting
D5500/D5300/D5200/D5100/
D5000/D3300/D3200/D3100/
D3000/D70 series/D60/
D40 series
18 mm 1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
24 mm
35–140 mm No vignetting
390 Technical Notes
❚❚ Vibration Reduction (VR)
Vibration reduction can be enabled by sliding the
vibration reduction switch to ON and takes effect
whenever the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway. Vibration reduction reduces blur caused
by camera shake, allowing shutter speeds up to 4.0
stops slower than would otherwise be the case (as measured at
140 mm with a D300s camera according to Camera and Imaging
Products Association [CIPA] standards; effects vary with the
photographer and shooting conditions). This increases the
range of shutter speeds available.
DVibration Reduction
•When using vibration reduction, press the shutter-release button
halfway and wait for the image in the viewfinder to stabilize before
pressing the shutter-release button the rest of the way down.
•When vibration reduction is active, the image in the viewfinder may
jiggle after the shutter is released. This does not indicate a
malfunction.
•When the camera is panned, vibration reduction applies only to
motion that is not part of the pan (if the camera is panned
horizontally, for example, vibration reduction will be applied only to
vertical shake), making it much easier to pan the camera smoothly in
a wide arc.
•Do not turn the camera off or remove the lens while vibration
reduction is in effect. If power to the lens is cut while vibration
reduction is on, the lens may rattle when shaken. This is not a
malfunction, and can be corrected by reattaching the lens and
turning the camera on.
•If the camera is equipped with a built-in flash, vibration reduction will
be disabled while the flash charges.
•Select OFF when the camera is mounted on a tripod unless the tripod
head is unsecured or the camera is mounted on a monopod, in which
case ON is recommended.
391Technical Notes
❚❚ Supplied Accessories
•67 mm snap-on Front Lens Cap LC-67
•Rear Lens Cap
❚❚ Compatible Accessories
•67 mm screw-on filters
•Rear Lens Cap LF-4
•Flexible Lens Pouch CL-1018
•Bayonet Hood HB-32
Align the lens hood mounting mark (●) with the lens hood
alignment mark ( ) as shown in Figure q and then rotate
the hood (w) until the ● mark is aligned with the lens hood
lock mark (—).
When attaching or removing the hood, hold it near the
symbol on its base and avoid gripping it too tightly.
Vignetting may occur if the hood is not correctly attached.
The hood can be reversed and mounted on the lens when not
in use.
392 Technical Notes
❚❚ Specifications
Type Type G AF-S DX lens with built-in CPU and F
mount
Focal length 18–140 mm
Maximum aperture f/3.5–5.6
Lens construction 17 elements in 12 groups (including 1 ED lens
element, 1 aspherical lens element)
Angle of view 76° – 11° 30 ´
Focal length scale Graduated in millimeters (18, 24, 35, 50, 70, 140)
Distance information Output to camera
Zoom Manual zoom using independent zoom ring
Focusing Nikon Internal Focusing (IF) System with
autofocus controlled by Silent Wave Motor and
separate focus ring for manual focus
Vibration reduction Lens shift using voice coil motors (VCMs)
Minimum focus distance 0.45 m (1.48 ft) from focal plane (089) at all
zoom positions
Diaphragm blades 7 (rounded diaphragm opening)
Diaphragm Fully automatic
Aperture range •18 mm focal length: f/3.5–22
•140 mm focal length: f/5.6–38
The minimum aperture displayed may vary
depending on the size of the exposure
increment selected with the camera.
Metering Full aperture
Filter-attachment size 67 mm (P = 0.75 mm)
Dimensions Approx. 78 mm maximum diameter × 97 mm
(distance from camera lens mount flange)
Weight Approx. 490 g (17.3 oz)
393Technical Notes
AF-S DX NIKKOR 55–200mm f/4–5.6G ED VR II
This retractable lens is for use exclusively with DX format Nikon
digital camera. The parts of the lens are listed below.
❚❚ Focus
Focus mode is determined by the camera focus mode and the
position of the lens A-M mode switch (078, 88).
❚❚ Using the Built-in Flash
When using the built-in flash, be sure the subject is at a range of
at least 0.6 m (2 ft) and remove lens hoods to prevent vignetting
(shadows created where the end of the lens obscures the built-in
flash).
Shadow Vignetting
Focal length scale
Focal length mark
A-M mode switch (037, 88)
Vibration reduction
ON/OFF switch (0394)
Lens mounting mark
(029)
Rear lens cap
Lens cap
CPU contacts
(0315)
Focus ring (088, 165)
Retractable lens barrel
button (030)
Zoom ring (039)
394 Technical Notes
❚❚ Vibration Reduction (VR)
Vibration reduction can be enabled by sliding the
vibration reduction switch to ON and takes effect
whenever the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway. Vibration reduction reduces blur caused
by camera shake, allowing shutter speeds up to 4.0
stops slower than would otherwise be the case and increasing
the range of shutter speeds available. The effects of VR on
shutter speed are measured according to Camera and Imaging
Products Association (CIPA) standards; FX-format lenses are
measured using FX-format digital cameras, DX-format lenses
using DX-format cameras. Zoom lenses are measured at
maximum zoom.
DVibration Reduction
•When using vibration reduction, press the shutter-release button
halfway and wait for the image in the viewfinder to stabilize before
pressing the shutter-release button the rest of the way down.
•When vibration reduction is active, the image in the viewfinder may
jiggle after the shutter is released. This does not indicate a
malfunction.
•When the camera is panned, vibration reduction applies only to
motion that is not part of the pan (if the camera is panned
horizontally, for example, vibration reduction will be applied only to
vertical shake), making it much easier to pan the camera smoothly in
a wide arc.
•Do not turn the camera off or remove the lens while vibration
reduction is in effect.
•If the camera is equipped with a built-in flash, vibration reduction will
be disabled while the flash charges.
•Select OFF when the camera is mounted on a tripod unless the tripod
head is unsecured or the camera is mounted on a monopod, in which
case ON is recommended.
395Technical Notes
❚❚ Supplied Accessories
•52mm snap-on Front Lens Cap LC-52
•Rear Lens Cap
❚❚ Compatible Accessories
•52 mm screw-on filters
•Rear Lens Cap LF-4
•Flexible Lens Pouch CL-0915
•Bayonet Hood HB-37
Align the lens hood mounting mark (●) with the lens hood
alignment mark ( ) as shown in Figure q and then rotate
the hood (w) until the ● mark is aligned with the lens hood
lock mark (—).
When attaching or removing the hood, hold it near the
symbol on its base and avoid gripping it too tightly.
Vignetting may occur if the hood is not correctly attached.
The hood can be reversed and mounted on the lens when not
in use. When the hood is reversed, it can be attached and
removed by rotating it while holding it near the lock mark
(—).
396 Technical Notes
❚❚ Specifications
Type Type G AF-S DX lens with built-in CPU and F
mount
Focal length 55–200 mm
Maximum aperture f/4–5.6
Lens construction 13 elements in 9 groups (including 1 ED lens
element)
Angle of view 28° 50 ´ – 8°
Focal length scale Graduated in millimeters (55, 70, 85, 105, 135,
200)
Distance information Output to camera
Zoom Manual zoom using independent zoom ring
Focusing Nikon Internal Focusing (IF) System with
autofocus controlled by Silent Wave Motor and
separate focus ring for manual focus
Vibration reduction Lens shift using voice coil motors (VCMs)
Minimum focus distance 1.1 m (3.7 ft) from focal plane (089) at all zoom
positions
Diaphragm blades 7 (rounded diaphragm opening)
Diaphragm Fully automatic
Aperture range •55 mm focal length: f/4–22
•200 mm focal length: f/5.6–32
Metering Full aperture
Filter-attachment size 52 mm (P = 0.75 mm)
Dimensions Approx. 70.5 mm maximum diameter × 83 mm
(distance from camera lens mount flange when
lens is retracted)
Weight Approx. 300 g (10.6 oz)
397Technical Notes
DLens Care
•Keep the CPU contacts clean.
•Use a blower to remove dust and lint from the lens surfaces.
To
remove smudges and fingerprints, apply a small amount of ethanol
or lens cleaner to a soft, clean cotton cloth or lens-cleaning tissue and
clean from the center outwards using a circular motion, taking care
not to leave smears or touch the glass with your fingers.
•Never use organic solvents such as paint thinner or benzene to clean
the lens.
•The lens hood or NC filters can be used to protect the front lens
element.
•Attach the front and rear caps before placing the lens in its flexible
pouch.
•When a lens hood is attached, do not pick up or hold the lens or
camera using only the hood.
•If the lens will not be used for an extended period, store it in a cool,
dry location to prevent mold and rust.
Do not store in direct sunlight
or with naphtha or camphor moth balls.
•Keep the lens dry.
Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause
irreparable damage.
•Leaving the lens in extremely hot locations could damage or warp
parts made from reinforced plastic.
398 Technical Notes
AA Note on Wide- and Super Wide-Angle Lenses
Autofocus may not provide the desired results in situations like those
shown below.
1 Objects in the background occupy more of the focus point than the main subject:
If the focus point contains both
foreground and background
objects, the camera may focus on
the background and the subject
may be out of focus.
Example: A far-off portrait
subject at some distance from
the background
2 The subject contains many fine details.
The camera may have difficulty
focusing on subjects that lack
contrast or appear smaller than
objects in the background.
Example: A field of flowers
In these cases, use manual focus, or use focus lock to focus on another
subject at the same distance and then recompose the photograph.
For
more information, see “Getting Good Results with Autofocus” (080).
399Technical Notes
The following table shows the approximate number of pictures
that can be stored on a 16 GB SanDisk Extreme Pro 95 MB/s
SDHC UHS-I card at different image quality and size settings.
Memory Card Capacity
Image quality Image size File size 1No.
of
images1
Buffer
capacity 2
NEF (RAW),
Compressed, 14-bit — 24.4 MB 428 10
NEF (RAW),
Compressed, 12-bit — 19.7 MB 511 14
JPEG fine
Large 12.3 MB 929 100
Medium 7.9 MB 1500 100
Small 3.9 MB 2900 100
JPEG normal
Large 6.1 MB 1800 100
Medium 3.9 MB 3000 100
Small 2.1 MB 5600 100
JPEG basic
Large 2.0 MB 3500 100
Medium 1.5 MB 5700 100
Small 1.0 MB 10300 100
1 All figures are approximate.
Results will vary with card type, camera settings, and scene
recorded.
2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at ISO 100.
Drops when
long exposure noise reduction (0243), auto distortion control (0245), or Date stamp
(0256) is on.
400 Technical Notes
The movie footage or number of shots that can be recorded with
fully-charged batteries varies with the condition of the battery,
temperature, the interval between shots, and the length of time
menus are displayed.
Sample figures for EN-EL14a (1230 mAh)
batteries are given below.
•Photographs, single-frame release mode (CIPA standard 1):
Approximately 820 shots
•Photographs, continuous release mode (Nikon standard 2):
Approximately 3110 shots
•Movies: Approximately 65 minutes at 1080/60p and 1080/50p 3
1 Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm
f/3.5–5.6G VR II lens under the following test conditions: lens cycled from
infinity to minimum range and one photograph taken at default settings once
every 30 s; after photograph is taken, monitor is turned on; tester waits for
monitor to turn off; flash fired at full power once every other shot.
Live view not
used.
2 Measured at 20 °C/68 °F with an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II
lens under the following test conditions: vibration reduction off, continuous
high-speed release mode, focus mode set to AF-C, image quality set to JPEG
basic, image size set to M (medium), white balance set to Auto, ISO sensitivity
set to ISO 100, shutter speed 1/250 s, focus cycled from infinity to minimum range
three times after shutter-release button has been pressed halfway for 3 s; six
shots are then taken in succession and monitor turned on; cycle repeated once
monitor has turned off.
3 Measured at 23°C/73.4°F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with the camera at default settings and
an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II lens under conditions specified
by the Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA).
Individual movies can
be up to 20 minutes in length or 4 GB in size; recording may end before these
limits are reached if the camera temperature rises.
Battery Life
401Technical Notes
The following can reduce battery life:
•Using the monitor
•Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway
•Repeated autofocus operations
•Taking NEF (RAW) photographs
•Slow shutter speeds
•Using the built-in Wi-Fi function or using an optional GP-1 or
GP-1A GPS unit or WR-R10/WR-1 wireless remote controller
•Using an Eye-Fi card
•Using VR (vibration reduction) mode with VR lenses
•Repeatedly zooming in and out with an AF-P lens.
To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon
EN-EL14a batteries:
•Keep the battery contacts clean.
Soiled contacts can reduce
battery performance.
•Use batteries immediately after charging.
Batteries will lose
their charge if left unused.
402 Technical Notes
Symbols
i (Auto mode) ............................... 4, 38
j (Auto (flash off) mode)............ 4, 38
h (Scene)................................... 4, 54
k (Portrait) ............................................55
l (Landscape)......................................55
p (Child).................................................55
m (Sports)...............................................56
n (Close up)..........................................56
o (Night portrait)................................56
r (Night landscape)...........................57
s (Party/indoor)..................................57
t (Beach/snow)...................................57
u (Sunset)..............................................58
v (Dusk/dawn) ....................................58
w (Pet portrait) ....................................58
x (Candlelight)......................................59
y (Blossom)...........................................59
z (Autumn colors)..............................59
0 (Food) ..................................................60
q (Special effects) .................. 4, 61
% (Night vision) ...................................61
S (Super vivid) .....................................62
T (Pop) ..................................................62
U (Photo illustration)..................62, 66
' (Toy camera effect).................63, 67
( (Miniature effect) ....................63, 68
3 (Selective color).......................63, 69
1 (Silhouette).......................................64
2 (High key)..........................................64
3 (Low key)...........................................64
P (Programmed auto) ........4, 113, 115
S (Shutter-priority auto) ....4, 113, 117
A (Aperture-priority auto).4, 113, 118
M (Manual) .............................4, 113, 119
U (flexible program)........................ 116
8 (Single frame) .................................71
! (Continuous L)...................... 71, 72
9 (Continuous H)..................... 71, 72
E (Self-timer) ................................ 71, 75
" (Delayed remote (ML-L3))71, 107
# (Quick-response remote (ML-L3)) ...
71, 107
J (Quiet shutter release)......... 71, 74
c (Single-point AF).......................... 82
d (Dynamic-area AF)....................... 82
e (Auto-area AF)............................... 83
f (3D-tracking) .......................... 83, 84
6 (Face-priority AF)................166, 167
7 (Wide-area AF).....................166, 167
8 (Normal-area AF) ................166, 167
9 (Subject-tracking AF)......166, 167
L (Matrix metering) ........................125
M (Center-weighted metering)...125
N (Spot metering)............................125
o (auto flash)................................ 94
j (red-eye reduction).............. 94, 96
p (slow sync)......................... 94, 96
q (rear-curtain sync) ................. 96
Y (Flash compensation)...............131
E (Exposure compensation) ........129
e (AE bracketing)....................148
f (WB bracketing) .................148
g (ADL bracketing) ...............148
d (Help) ................................................. 14
m (White balance) ...........................137
L (Preset manual)..........................142
I (focus indicator)............... 40, 86, 89
N (flash-ready indicator) .... 5, 44, 328
a (live view)................45, 50, 162, 174
P button........................................10, 189
t (Memory buffer).....................73, 399
Index
403Technical Notes
Numerics
2016-pixel RGB sensor 260, 315, 366,
368
3D color matrix metering.............. 315
3D-tracking (AF-area mode).....83, 84
A
A/V cable ............................................. 220
AC adapter.................................330, 335
Access lamp...........................................41
Accessories ......................................... 330
Accessory terminal .......................... 282
Accessory terminal accessories... 333
Active D-Lighting ............................. 133
Add items (My Menu) ..................... 310
ADL bracketing (Auto bracketing set)
148
Adobe RGB.......................................... 243
AE bracketing (Auto bracketing set).
148
AE lock.................................................. 127
AE-L ....................................................... 127
AE-L/AF-L button..................87, 127, 267
AF ................................... 78–87, 164–167
AF area brackets ...........................33, 40
AF-A..........................................................78
AF-area mode ............................. 82, 166
AF-assist illuminator........81, 250, 318
AF-C................................................ 78, 248
AF-F ....................................................... 164
AF-S ................................................ 78, 164
A-M mode switch... 88, 383, 388, 393
Angle of view..................................... 322
Aperture ........................... 114, 118, 120
Aperture-priority auto.................... 118
Assign AE-L/AF-L button ............... 267
Assign Fn button.............................. 265
Assign touch Fn ................................ 268
Auto (White balance)...................... 137
Auto bracketing.......................148, 264
Auto distortion control...................245
Auto flash............................................... 94
Auto image rotation ........................235
Auto info display...............................278
Auto ISO sensitivity control ..........241
Auto off timers...................................253
Auto-area AF (AF-area mode) ........ 83
Autoexposure lock ...........................127
Autofocus ....................78–87, 164–167
Auto-servo AF ...................................... 78
Available settings .............................348
B
Battery ................................. 27, 330, 373
Beep options ......................................276
Black-and-white ................................299
Body cap ......................................... 1, 332
Border (PictBridge)...........................215
Bracketing ................................. 148, 264
Built-in AF-assist illuminator.81, 250,
318
Built-in flash.................................93, 320
Bulb........................................................121
Burst......................................................... 72
C
Calendar playback............................191
Camera Control Pro 2......................332
Capture NX-D.....................................210
CEC.........................................................223
Center-weighted metering...........125
Charger................................ 27, 330, 373
Choose start/end point ..................183
Clean image sensor..........................338
Clock...............................................32, 275
Clock battery ........................................ 33
Cloudy (White balance)..................137
CLS .........................................................323
Color outline.......................................302
Color sketch........................................303
Color space .........................................243
404 Technical Notes
Color temperature........................... 139
Commander mode .......................... 260
Compatible lenses........................... 314
Conformity marking...............285, 375
Continuous (Release mode).....71, 72
Continuous-servo AF............... 78, 248
Copyright...................................197, 274
CPU contacts...................................... 315
CPU lens............................................... 314
Creative Lighting System.............. 323
Cropping (PictBridge)..................... 215
Cross screen (Filter effects)........... 298
Custom Settings............................... 246
Cyanotype .......................................... 299
D
Date and time............................. 32, 275
Date counter.............................256, 257
Date format................................. 32, 275
Date stamp......................................... 256
Daylight saving time................ 32, 275
DCF version 2.0 ................................. 374
Delayed remote (ML-L3)......... 71, 107
Delete................................................... 205
Delete all images.............................. 206
Delete current image...................... 205
Delete selected images.................. 206
Device control (HDMI).................... 223
Digital Print Order Format ..216, 218,
374
Diopter adjustment control .. 33, 331
Direct sunlight (White balance).. 137
Distortion control....................245, 296
D-Lighting........................................... 294
DPOF...................................216, 218, 374
DPOF print order.............................. 218
Dynamic-area AF.................................82
E
Edit movie..................................183, 186
Electronic rangefinder............. 89, 250
EV steps for exposure cntrl............252
Exif version 2.3...................................374
Exposure ..................114, 125, 127, 129
Exposure bracketing .......................148
Exposure compensation................129
Exposure delay mode .....................254
Exposure indicator..................120, 169
Exposure lock.....................................127
Exposure meters................................. 44
Exposure mode .................................113
External microphone..............180, 333
Eye sensor ...................................... 9, 278
Eye-Fi upload .....................................284
F
Face-priority AF.................................166
File information.................................193
File naming.........................................240
File number sequence....................255
Filter effects.....................155, 157, 298
Filters.....................................................330
Fine-tuning white balance............140
Firmware version..............................285
Fisheye..................................................297
Flash ........................................44, 93, 323
Flash (White balance)......................137
Flash cntrl for built-in flash ...........259
Flash compensation ........................131
Flash control.......................................260
Flash mode .................................... 94, 96
Flash range............................................ 98
Flash ready indicator........... 5, 44, 328
Flash sync speed........................98, 365
Flat (Set Picture Control)................152
Flexible program ..............................116
Flicker reduction......................176, 281
Fluorescent (White balance)137, 138
Fn button..............................................265
f-number.....................................114, 118
Focal length........................................322
Focal length scale.377, 383, 388, 393
405Technical Notes
Focal plane mark .................................89
Focus............................. 78–89, 164–167
Focus indicator.......................40, 86, 89
Focus lock ..............................................86
Focus mode................................. 78, 164
Focus point...40, 82, 86, 89, 166, 167,
249
Focusing screen................................ 365
Focusing the viewfinder...................33
Focus-mode switch .....................37, 88
Format.................................................. 272
Format memory card...................... 272
Frame interval (Slide show) .......... 209
Frame size/frame rate..................... 177
Framing grid .............................170, 256
Front-curtain sync...............................96
Full-frame playback......................... 188
Full-time-servo AF............................ 164
G
GPS unit ............................................... 283
H
H.264..................................................... 370
HDMI............................................222, 374
HDMI-CEC............................................ 223
HDR (high dynamic range) ........... 135
Help..........................................................14
High definition .........................222, 374
High Dynamic Range (HDR) ......... 135
High ISO NR........................................ 244
High-angle shots ................................... 6
Highlights...................................193, 234
Histogram ..................................194, 234
I
Image comment ............................... 273
Image Dust Off ref photo .............. 279
Image overlay.................................... 300
Image quality........................................90
Image review ..................................... 234
Image size.............................................. 92
Incandescent (White balance) .....137
Info display auto off.................... 9, 278
Info display format...........................277
In-focus indicator.................. 40, 86, 89
Information display..................... 8, 277
Infrared receiver................................108
Interval timer shooting...................101
ISO display...........................................252
ISO sensitivity..............................99, 241
i-TTL ............................................. 259, 260
i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital
SLR........................................................260
J
JPEG......................................................... 90
JPEG basic.............................................. 90
JPEG fine ................................................ 90
JPEG normal.......................................... 90
L
Landscape (Set Picture Control)..152
Language......................................32, 275
Large (Image size)............................... 92
Lens...........29, 314, 377, 383, 388, 393
Lens focus ring88, 377, 383, 388, 393
Lens mount.......................................1, 89
Lens vibration reduction switch... 37,
384, 390, 394
Live view ...................... 45, 50, 162, 174
Location data ........................... 199, 283
Lock mirror up for cleaning...........340
Long exposure NR............................243
Low-angle shots.....................................6
M
Manage Picture Control .................158
Manual...........................................88, 119
Manual focus..................... 88, 164, 165
Manual movie settings ...................179
Matrix metering.................................125
406 Technical Notes
Maximum aperture.............................89
Maximum sensitivity....................... 241
Medium (Image size) .........................92
Memory buffer.....................................73
Memory card.............28, 272, 334, 399
Memory card capacity.................... 399
Metering.............................................. 125
Microphone........................................ 178
Miniature effect ......................... 68, 304
Minimum shutter speed................ 241
Mired .................................................... 141
Mirror................................................1, 340
Mode dial ................................................. 4
Monitor.........................6, 162, 188, 276
Monitor brightness.......................... 276
Monochrome..................................... 299
Monochrome (Set Picture Control) ...
152
Mounting mark29, 377, 383, 388, 393
Movie quality..................................... 177
Movie settings................................... 177
Movie-record button ............... 51, 175
Movies........................................... 50, 174
My Menu ............................................. 310
N
NEF (RAW)...........................90, 240, 289
NEF (RAW) processing.................... 289
NEF (RAW) recording ...................... 240
Network connection....................... 226
Neutral (Set Picture Control)........ 152
Nikon Transfer 2 ............................... 212
No. of copies (PictBridge).............. 215
Non-CPU lens..................................... 316
Normal-area AF................................. 166
Number of focus points................. 249
Number of shots............................... 400
O
Optional flash .................................... 323
Output resolution (HDMI)............. 223
Overview data....................................198
P
Page size (PictBridge)......................215
Painting................................................307
Perspective control..........................297
Photo Illustration.......................66, 303
Photo information...................192, 234
PictBridge...................................214, 374
Picture Controls........................152, 154
PIN-entry WPS....................................228
Playback...............................................188
Playback display options ...............234
Playback folder..................................234
Playback information.............192, 234
Playback menu..................................233
Playback zoom ..................................200
Portrait (Set Picture Control) ........152
Power connector .....................330, 335
Power switch........................................ 31
Preset manual (White balance) .. 137,
142
Press the shutter-release button all
the way down .................................... 41
Press the shutter-release button
halfway .......................................... 40, 41
Print (DPOF)...............................216, 219
Print date (PictBridge).....................215
Print select ..........................................216
Printing.................................................214
Programmed auto............................115
Protecting photographs ................202
Push-button WPS .............................226
Q
Quick retouch ....................................295
Quick-response remote (ML-L3) .. 71,
107
Quiet shutter release.................. 71, 74
407Technical Notes
R
Rangefinder........................................ 250
Rank items (My Menu).................... 313
Rating ..........................................203, 209
Rear-curtain sync.................................96
Recent settings.................................. 309
Red-eye correction .......................... 295
Red-eye reduction .......................94, 96
Release mode .......................................71
Remote control ........................107, 332
Remote cord..............................121, 333
Remote on duration (ML-L3)........ 254
Remote shutter release.................. 282
Remove items (My Menu) ............. 312
Reset .................................. 110, 237, 248
Reset custom settings .................... 248
Reset shooting menu...................... 237
Resize.................................................... 292
Retouch menu................................... 286
Retractable lens barrel button.30, 37
Reverse dial rotation ....................... 269
Reverse indicators............................ 258
RGB...............................................194, 243
RGB histogram .................................. 194
Rotate tall............................................ 235
S
Save selected frame ........................ 186
Scene auto selector............................47
Scene mode ..........................................54
Select to send to smart device .... 231
Selective color ............................ 69, 305
Self-portrait ............................................. 6
Self-timer............................... 71, 75, 254
Sensitivity..................................... 99, 241
Sepia ..................................................... 299
Set clock from satellite................... 283
Set Picture Control........................... 154
Setup menu........................................ 270
Shade (White balance) ................... 137
Shooting data ....................................196
Shooting menu..................................236
Shutter-priority auto........................117
Shutter-release button ....41, 86, 127,
252
Shutter-release button AE-L.........252
Side-by-side comparison...............307
Single frame (Release mode).......... 71
Single-point AF (AF-area mode).... 82
Single-servo AF...........................78, 164
Size........................................ 92, 177, 291
Skylight (Filter effects) ....................298
Slide show ...........................................208
Slot empty release lock...................281
Slow sync........................................ 94, 96
Small (Image size)............................... 92
Soft (Filter effects) ............................298
Special effects mode ......................... 61
Speedlight...........................................323
Spot metering....................................125
sRGB.......................................................243
SSID........................................................229
Standard (Set Picture Control).....152
Standard i-TTL fill-flash for digital
SLR.............................................. 260, 325
Standby timer ................... 44, 253, 283
Start printing (PictBridge).... 216, 217
Storage folder ....................................238
Straighten............................................296
Subject-tracking AF .........................166
T
Television.............................................220
Thumbnail playback ........................190
Time.......................................................121
Time zone.....................................32, 275
Time zone and date .........................275
Timer ..............................................75, 101
Toning......................................... 155, 157
Touch controls......................... 157, 276
Touch screen ........................................ 17
408 Technical Notes
Touch Shutter.......................................21
Trim....................................................... 291
Trimming movies............................. 183
Type D lens......................................... 315
Type E lens.......................................... 315
Type G lens......................................... 315
U
USB cable ............................................ 211
UTC...............................................199, 283
V
Vari-angle monitor ............................... 6
Vibration reduction37, 379, 384, 390,
394
Video mode...............................221, 281
View SSID ............................................ 229
Viewfinder ...............................5, 33, 365
Viewfinder eyepiece cap..................76
Viewfinder grid display.................. 256
ViewNX 2....................................210, 211
Vignette control ............................... 244
Vivid (Set Picture Control)............. 152
Volume........................................182, 208
W
Warm filter (Filter effects).............. 298
WB.......................................................... 137
WB bracketing (Auto bracketing set)
148
White balance ................................... 137
Wide-area AF ..................................... 166
Wi-Fi................................................xx, 224
Wind noise reduction..................... 178
Wireless..........................................xx, 224
Wireless Mobile Utility...........224, 225
Wireless remote controller .109, 282,
333
409
410
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part (except
for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be made without
written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION.
SB6H03(11)
6MB25711-03

Navigation menu